Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit EL07-715 - SEARS
SEARS 400 SOUTHCENTER MALL ELO7-71 5 Parcel No.: Address: Suite No: Tenant: Name: Address: Owner: Name: Address: Contact Person: Name: Address: 5379200330 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Contractor: Name: SEA TAC ELECTRIC INC Address: 7056 S 220TH ST , KENT WA Contractor License No: SEATAEI077RW DESCRIPTION O£ WORK: ELECTRICAL WORK TO SUPPORT NEW 2ND LEVEL EXTERIOR ENTRY AND MALL ENTRY WITH MINOR NEW INTERIOR LIGHTING, POWER FOR ROLLIN GGRILL, SIGNAGE AND CEILING HEATER, NEW EXTERIOR WALL LIGHTS AND POWER ASSIST DOOR. Value of Electrical: $15,000.00 Permit Center Authorized Signature: City .A Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us SEARS 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL , TUKWILA WA WEA SOUTHCENTER LLC 11601 WILSHIRE BLVD , LOS ANGELES CA MILTON LANSER 4582 S ULSTER ST PY, STE 1501 , DENVER CO Type of Fire Protection: National Electrical Code Edition: Electrical Service provided by: PUGET SOUND ENERGY I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this electrical permit. doc: EL - 4/07 Print Name: IP� ELECTRICAL PERMIT Fees Collected: Permit Number: Issue Date: Permit Expires On: ELM-715 03/28/2008 09/24/2008 Phone: Phone: 303 741 -3737 X 285 Phone: Expiration Date: 12/16/2009 $410.00 2005 G-J Date: � g Date: i)7- l This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. EL07 -715 Printed: 03 -28 -2008 Parcel No.: 5379200330 Address: 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Suite No: Tenant: SEARS 1: ** *ELECTRICAL * ** Signature: Print Name: /( ! e ! CZ / l -rS(« doc: Cond -Elec City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us PERMIT CONDITIONS Permit Number: ELOZ -715 Status: ISSUED Applied Date: 11/27/2007 Issue Date: 03/28/2008 2: A copy of the electrical work permit shall be posted or otherwise made readily accessible to the Electrical Inspector at each work site. 3: Approved plans shall be maintained at the construction site and shall be readily available to the Electrical Inspector. 4: All electrical work shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 - NEC, and requirements for electrical installations, Chapter 296 -46B WAC. 5: When any portion of the electrical installation is to be hidden from view by permanent placement of parts of the building, such equipment shall not be concealed until it has been inspected and approved by the Electrical Inspector. 6: The issuance of an electrical work permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of the provisions of the electrical code or other ordinances of the jurisdiction. Permits or related documentation that presumes to grant this authority are therefore not valid. 7: Any change in the scope of work described by the electrical work permit shall require additional work permits. Where approved plans have been issued, revisions to the plans and additional review may be required. I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. Date: 3( ZlO U EL07 - 715 Printed: 03 -28 -2008 Name: CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 httc://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us F1: \Applications\Forms- Applications On Line \4 -2007- Electrical Permit Application doc bh Electrical Permit . / ' Project No. ? O ' l L ?1 (F of ce use only} ELECTRICAL PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *Please Print ** So King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 531'12.b 0330 S Site Address: 4O0 -rH C..- INOVF Z. m A�--�— Suite Number: NA- Floor: /o/f. Tenant Name: NA- New Tenant: ❑ Yes .J..No Property Owners Name: SE #s VS eorr? -•/L q C-h �a- gs /A 0 / Mailing Address: � g33 gg �[r%t�, � 7 �n o�AN �57�4'ik'7 � � !� �� City State Zip CONTACT PERSON - Who do we contact when your permit is ready to be issued MICreno LAN Ota- Mailing Address: 4Q2 OL T ral2 ST Su Cllr( lSt l E - Mail Address: YYV I & Ste. Mir o• Gown ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Mailing Address: Day Telephonet3 cP3) — 741 —373 7 )c6' S - Iv+ rite C e) vo 7 City State Zip Fax Number(T7 ) 10'7 --1( e S~ Contact Person: E -Mail Address: Contractor Registration Number: City Day Telephone: Fax Number: Expiration Date: State Zip Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ VC) try Ora 54" Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): 5L C�T'2 -1., CMOQ- %-+'poor NVA' - EN Le Ala- E - . oaZ 54Te 4' 14U WI T) -t n1114012- N ru ril+ - Lit; L4T7Aili POuv0.0_ im l.rnis 6/2 ILA -Ci NAl 5. g 14nl o C& it. /n5 / NW t7)o2 CA /j &/i7 r A AV/ ihrisr /Jco, Will service be altered? ❑ Yes IX No Adding more than 50 amps? ❑ Yes No Type of Use: R a L L-- Type of work: ❑ New ❑ Addition ❑ Service Change Remodel ❑ Tenant Improvement ❑ Low Voltage ❑ Generator ❑ Fire Alarm ❑ Telecommunication ❑ Temporary Service Property Served by: Puget Sound Energy ❑ Seattle City Light Page 1 of 2 RESIDENTIAL NEW RESIDENTIAL SERVICE ❑ New single family dwellings $140.00 (including an attached garage) ❑ Garages, pools, spas and outbuildings $75.00 ea ❑ Low voltage systems (alarm, furnace thermostat) $55.00 ea RESIDENTIAL REMODEL AND SERVICE CHANGES ❑ Service change or alteration $75.00 (no added/altered circuits) ❑ Service change with added/altered circuits $75.00 number of added circuits $10.00 ea ❑ Circuits added/altered without service change $50.00 (up to 5 circuits) ❑ Circuits added/altered without service change $50.00 (6 or more circuits) $7.00 ea ❑ Meter /mast repair $65.00 ❑ Low voltage systems $55.00 (alarm, furnace thermostat) BUILDING OWNER OR ELECTRICA RACTOR: Signature: Print me. /4 /672N / P/S Mailing Address:45 C' 0-4 7151- Cr ,SJ int I Date Application Accepted: (I (7 i41- H\Apphcat,ons\Forms-Applicaftons On Line \4 -2007 - Electrical Permit Application.doc bh MULTI - FAMILY AND COMMERCIAL Fees are based on the valuation of the electrical contract. MISCELLANEOUS FEES ❑ Temporary service (residential) $58.00 ❑ Temporary service (generator) $75.00 ❑ Manufactured/mobile home service $80.00 (excluding garage or outbuilding) ❑ Carnivals $75.00 Number of concessions $10.00 ea PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES - Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not to exceed 90 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. Day Telephone: og,Y City Date: 11 PI )07 C350 141 3 737 xa�s' Co State 'o237 Zip Date Application Expires: (gvg gQ, Staff Initials: Page 2 of 2 Initials: WER User ID: 1655 Payee: SEA -TAC ELECTRIC ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description ELECTRICAL PERMIT - NONR City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: //www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Payment Check 8806 58.00 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount RECEIPT Parcel No.: 5379200330 Permit Number: EL07 -715 Address: 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: ISSUED Suite No: Applied Date: 11/27/2007 Applicant: SEARS Issue Date: 03/28/2008 Receipt No.: R08 -01647 Payment Amount: $58.00 Account Code Current Pmts 000.322.101.00.0 58.00 Total: $58.00 Payment Date: 05/15/2008 09:00 AM Balance: $0.00 2508 05/16 9710 TOTAL 58.00 doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 05-15 -2008 Receipt No.: R08 -00958 Payee: SEA -TAC ELECTRIC City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 8788 328.00 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description ELECTRICAL PERMIT - NONR RECEIPT Parcel No.: 5379200330 Permit Number: EL07 -715 Address: 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 11/27/2007 Applicant: SEARS Issue Date: Payment Amount: 3328.00 Initials: WER Payment Date: 03/28/2008 02:06 PM User ID: 1655 Balance: 30.00 Account Code Current Pmts 000.322.101.00.0 328.00 Total: $328.00 0517 03/28 1I TOTAL Y".. 320.00 doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 03 -28 -2008 RECEIPT NO: R07 -02583 Initials: JEM User ID: 1165 Payee: S.A. MIRO, INC. SET ID: S000000901 SET TRANSACTIONS: Set Member Amount ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: //www. ci. tukwila. wa. us 724.34 82.00 806.34 Payment Check 32210 ELECTRICAL PLAN - NONRES PLAN CHECK - NONRES SET RECEIPT Payment Date: 11/27/2007 Total Payment: 806.34 SET NAME: Tmp set/Initialized Activities TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount 806.34 TOTAL: 806.34 Account Code Current Pmts 000.345.832.00.0 82.00 000/345.830 724.34 TOTAL: 806.34 5397 11/27 9710 TOTAL 806.34 Project: 5 Type of Inspection: 2100 Address: 01 1 1414 Date Called: Special I structions: Date Wanted: � a.m. .m. Requester: 1 Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 0°- 7 cl INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION V 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3070 COMMENTS: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. —J trC1�l r ate: 7 ..f 6 'r El $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 'Inspector: 'Receipt No.: 'Date: Project: 6E41-5 Type of Inspection 7600 ° Address: 301' Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 723 ( a.m. Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD 0- Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION '- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -36k0 El Approved per applicable codes. Lrrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: V57? P efr ,6? G/)/'LE 7 ' u) t' S (,n/cI OA/ N /Vic-r U/L ADGG I'/ A YI O/ ,' 4/\ s/6 (Inspector: N� I Date: of t El $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: 'Date: Project Info Project Address Sears mall Store Date 11/17/2007 400 Southcenter Mall For Building Department Use Tukwila, Washington 98188 Applicant Name: Milton Lanser / S. A. Miro, Inc. Applicant Address: 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 80237 Applicant Phone: (303) 741 -3737 I Project Summary PRJ -SUM 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form REVIEWED O CODE COMPLIANCE NFPA 70 - NEC JAN - 7 NOB City Of Tukw B ILDIN D SION RECEIVED CITY OFTIJKWILA Nov 27 2007 Revised July 2007 FILE COPY aod4w416 Project Info Project Address Sears Mall Store Date 11/21/2007 400 Southcenter Mall For Building Department Use Tukwila, Washington 98188 Applicant Name: Milton Lanser / S. A. Miro, Inc. Applicant Address: 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, Co 80237 Applicant Phone: (303) 741 -3737 Project Description New Exterior Entry ❑ New Building ❑ Addition ✓ Alteration ✓ Plans Induded Indicate controls (Sections 1513) including commissioning requirements on plans. Location (floor /room no.) Alteration Exceptions (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) - No changes are being made to the lighting Area in ft ,, Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed. Location (floor /room no.) Occupancy Description Allowed Watts per ft Area in ft Allowed x Area New Mall Entry Retail 1.20 350.0 420.0 New Exterior Entry Retail 1.50 630.0 945.0 "" From Table 15 -1 (over) - document all exceptions on form LTG -LPA Total Allowed Watts 1365.0 Location (floor /room no.) Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed New Mall Entry Type 8 Compact Fluorescent 7 58.0 406.0 New Exterior Entry Type A 2 Foot Flourenscent (Match Existing) 6 101.0 606.0 Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Total Proposed Watts 1012.0 Interior Lighting Summary 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form LTG -INT I 0 Prescriptive 0 Lighting Power Allowance 0 Systems Analysis Compliance Option ( See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescri p p aces p l a tive & LPA s clearly on Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Proposed Lighting Wattage Notes: 1. For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. 2. For proposed Watts /Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not simply the lamp wattage) and other criteria as specified in Section 1530. For hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used. For track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable, the wattage of current limiting devices or of the transformer. 3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting, note section and exception number, and leave Watts /Fixture blank. Use' LPA` (W /sf) Use' LPA` (W /sf) Automotive facility 0.9 Office buildings, office /administrative areas in facilities of other use types (including but not limited to schools, hospitals, institutions, museums, banks, churches) 1.0 Convention center 1.2 Penitentiary and other Group 1 -3 Occupancies 1.0 Courthouse 1.2 Police and fire stations" 1.0 Cafeterias, fast food establishments', restaurants/bars 1.3 Post office 1.1 Dormitory 1.0 Retail retail banking, mall concourses, wholesale stores (pallet rack shelving) 1.5 Exercise center 1.0 School buildings (Group E Occupancy only), school classrooms, day care centers 1.2 Gymnasia ", assembly spaces" 1.0 Theater, motion picture 1.2 Health care clinic 1.0 Theater, performing arts 1.6 Hospital, nursing homes, and other Group I -1 and 1 -2 Occupancies 1.2 Transportation 1.0 Hotel motel 1.0 Warehouses ', storage areas 0.5 Hotel banquet/conference /exhibition hall 2.0 Workshops 1.4 Laboratory spaces (all spaces not classified "laboratory" shall meet office and other appropriate categories) 1.8 Parking garages 0.2 Laundries 1.2 Libraries' 1.3 Plans Submitted for Common Areas Only' Manufacturing facility 1.3 Main floor building lobbies' (except mall concourses) 1.2 Museum 1.1 Common areas, corridors, toilet facilities and washrooms, elevator lobbies 0.8 Prescriptive Spaces Occupancy: Q Warehouses, storage areas or aircraft storage hangers Q Other I Qualification Checklist Note: If occupancy type is "Other" and fixture answer is checked, the number of fixtures in the space is not limited by Code. Clearly indicate these spaces on plans. If not qualified, do LPA Calculations. Lighting Fixtures: (Section 1521) Check if 95% or more of fixtures comply with 1,2 or 3 and rest are ballasted. 1. Fluorescent fixtures which are non - lensed with a) 1 or 2 two lamps, b) reflector or louvers, c) 5 -60 watt T -1, T -2, T-4, T -5, T -8 lamps, and d) hard -wired elec- tronic dimming ballasts. Screw -in compact fluorescent fixtures do not qualify. 2. Metal Halide with a) reflector b) ceramic MH lamps <= 150w c) electronic ballasts 3. LED lights. Interior Lighting Summary (back) LTG -INT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Revised July 2007 TABLE 15 -1 Unit Liahtinq Power Allowance (LPA Footnotes for Table 15 -1 1) In cases in which a general use and a specific use are listed, the specific use shall apply. In cases in which a use is not mentioned specifically, the Unit Power Allowance shall be determined by the building official. This determination shall be based upon the most comparable use specified in the table. See Section 1512 for exempt areas. 2) The watts per square foot may be increased, by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twenty feet, unless specifically directed otherwise by subsequent footnotes. 3) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twelve feet. 4) For all other spaces, such as seating and common areas, use the Unit Light Power Allowance for assembly. 5) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above nine feet. 6) Reserved. 7) For conference rooms and offices less than 150ft with full height partitions, a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.10 w /ft may be used. 8) Reserved. 9) For indoor sport tournament courts with adjacent spectator seating over 5,000, the Unit Lighting Power Allowance for the court area is 2.60 W /ft 10) Display window illumination installed within 2 feet of the window, provided that the display window is separated from the retail space by walls or at least three - quarter- height partitions (transparent or opaque). and lighting for free- standing display where the lighting moves with the display are exempt. An additional 1.5 w/ft of merchandise display luminaires are exempt provided that they comply with all three of the following: a) located on ceiling- mounted track or directly on or recessed into the ceiling itself (not on the wall). b) adjustable in both the horizontal and vertical axes (vertical axis only is acceptable for fluorescent and other fixtures with two points of track attachment). c) fitted with LED, tungsten halogen, fluorescent, or high intensity discharge lamps. This additional lighting power is allowed only if the lighting is actually installed. 11) Provided that a floor plan, indicating rack location and height, is submitted, the square footage for a warehouse may be defined, for computing the interior Unit Lighting Power Allowance, as the floor area not covered by racks plus the vertical face area (access side only) of the racks. The height allowance defined in footnote 2 applies only to the floor area not covered by racks. Tradable Locations .r Description Allowed Watts per ft or per If Area (ft perimeter (If) or # of items Allowed Watts x ft (or x If) Other Entries N ew Second Floor Entry 20 W /LF of door widt 24.0 480.0 Non - Tradable Locations Description Allowed Watts per ft or per If Area (ft perimeter (If) or # of items Allowed Watts x ft (or x If) g g Number of Watts/ Watts Location Fixture Description Fixtures Fixture Proposed Number of Watts/ Watts Location Fixture Description Fixtures Fixture Proposed Bridge to Parking New 70 watt MB Full Cutoff Photo cell control 2 85.0 170. r *.ln- �u�_u_�__. __. ______ . �_ • _. - -- .. • Building Grounds 4 Efficacy > 60 lumens/W ❑ Controlled by motion Sensor (luminaires > 100 Watts) ❑ Exemption (list) t - - Exterior Lighting Summary LTG -EXT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Info Proj Address sears Mall Store 400 Southcenter Mall Tukwila, Washington 98188 Name: Milton Lancer / S. A. Miro, Inc. Appl. Name 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 8023' Appl. Phone (303) 741 -3737 Date 11/17/2007 For Building Department Use Project Description ❑ New ❑ Addition ig Alteration ig Plans Induded Indicate controls (Sections 1513) including commissioning requirements on plans. Compliance Option era on Exceptions (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Tradable Proposed Lighting Watta Non - Tradable Proposed Lightin Watta 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 0 Lighting Power Allowance No changes are being made to the lighting a lts for E xtenor Non - Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Watta ite we Watts for Category 0 Systems Analysis ❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed. Total Allowed Watts 480. 0 Use mfgr listed maximum input wattage. For fixtures with hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used. otal Proposed Watts Revised July 2007 17 Number of Watts/ Watts Location Fixture Description Fixtures Fixture Proposed Bridge to Parking New 70 watt MB Full Cutoff Photo cell control 2 85.0 170. r *.ln- �u�_u_�__. __. ______ . �_ • _. - -- .. • Building Grounds 4 Efficacy > 60 lumens/W ❑ Controlled by motion Sensor (luminaires > 100 Watts) ❑ Exemption (list) t - - Exterior Lighting Summary LTG -EXT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Info Proj Address sears Mall Store 400 Southcenter Mall Tukwila, Washington 98188 Name: Milton Lancer / S. A. Miro, Inc. Appl. Name 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 8023' Appl. Phone (303) 741 -3737 Date 11/17/2007 For Building Department Use Project Description ❑ New ❑ Addition ig Alteration ig Plans Induded Indicate controls (Sections 1513) including commissioning requirements on plans. Compliance Option era on Exceptions (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Tradable Proposed Lighting Watta Non - Tradable Proposed Lightin Watta 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 0 Lighting Power Allowance No changes are being made to the lighting a lts for E xtenor Non - Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Watta ite we Watts for Category 0 Systems Analysis ❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed. Total Allowed Watts 480. 0 Use mfgr listed maximum input wattage. For fixtures with hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used. otal Proposed Watts Revised July 2007 17 Building Grounds 4 Efficacy > 60 lumens/W ❑ Controlled by motion Sensor (luminaires > 100 Watts) ❑ Exemption (list) t - - Exterior Lighting Summary LTG -EXT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Info Proj Address sears Mall Store 400 Southcenter Mall Tukwila, Washington 98188 Name: Milton Lancer / S. A. Miro, Inc. Appl. Name 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 8023' Appl. Phone (303) 741 -3737 Date 11/17/2007 For Building Department Use Project Description ❑ New ❑ Addition ig Alteration ig Plans Induded Indicate controls (Sections 1513) including commissioning requirements on plans. Compliance Option era on Exceptions (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Tradable Proposed Lighting Watta Non - Tradable Proposed Lightin Watta 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 0 Lighting Power Allowance No changes are being made to the lighting a lts for E xtenor Non - Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Watta ite we Watts for Category 0 Systems Analysis ❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed. Total Allowed Watts 480. 0 Use mfgr listed maximum input wattage. For fixtures with hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used. otal Proposed Watts Revised July 2007 17 Exterior Lighting Summary LTG -EXT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Info Proj Address sears Mall Store 400 Southcenter Mall Tukwila, Washington 98188 Name: Milton Lancer / S. A. Miro, Inc. Appl. Name 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 8023' Appl. Phone (303) 741 -3737 Date 11/17/2007 For Building Department Use Project Description ❑ New ❑ Addition ig Alteration ig Plans Induded Indicate controls (Sections 1513) including commissioning requirements on plans. Compliance Option era on Exceptions (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Tradable Proposed Lighting Watta Non - Tradable Proposed Lightin Watta 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 0 Lighting Power Allowance No changes are being made to the lighting a lts for E xtenor Non - Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Watta ite we Watts for Category 0 Systems Analysis ❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed. Total Allowed Watts 480. 0 Use mfgr listed maximum input wattage. For fixtures with hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used. otal Proposed Watts Revised July 2007 17 Tradable Surfaces (Lighting power densities for uncovered parking areas, building grounds, building entrances and exits, canopies and overhangs and outdoor sales areas may be traded.) 1 Uncovered Parking Areas Parking lots and drives 1 0.15 W/ft Building Grounds Walkways less than 10 feet wide 1.0 W /linear foot Walkways 10 feet wide or greater Plaza areas Special feature areas 0.2W /ft Stairways 1.0 W/ft Building Entrances and Exits Main entries 30 W/linear foot of door width Other doors 20 W /linear foot of door width Canopies and Overhangs Canopies (free standing and attached and overhangs) 1.25 W/ft _ Outdoor Sales Open areas (including vehicle sales lots) 0.5 W/11 Street frontage for vehicle sales lots in addition to "open area" allowance 20 W /linear foot Non - Tradable Surfaces (Lighting power density calculations for the following applications can be used only for the specific application and cannot be traded between surfaces or with other exterior lighting. The following allowances are in addition to any allowance otherwise permitted in the "Tradable Surfaces" section of this table.) Building Facades 0.2 W/ft for each illuminated wall or surface or 5.0W/linear foot for each illuminated wall or surface length Automated teller machines and night depositories 270 W per location plus 90 W per additional ATM per location Entrances and gatehouse inspection stat at guarded facilities 1.25 W/ft of uncovered area (covered areas are included in the "Canopies and Overhangs" section of "Tradable Surfaces ") Loading areas for law enforcement, fire, ambulance and other emergency service vehicles 0.5 W/11 of uncovered area (covered areas are included in the "Canopies and Overhangs" section of "Tradable Surfaces") Material handling and associated storage 0.5 W /ft Drive -up windows at fast food restaurants 400W per drive - through Parking near 24 -hour retail entrances 800 W per main entry 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Exterior Lighting Summary (back) 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms TABLE 15 -2 LIGHTING POWER DENSITIES FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS Revised July 2007 S. A. Miro, Inc. M 1 R 0 S. A. Miro, Inc. . • 4582'South Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 • Denver, Colorado 80237 (303) 741 -3737 S. A.1Ulito - Project No. 07 -164 Southcenter Mall 'Tukwila, Washington -e -'q! RETAIL STORE NOV 27 2001i ALTERATIO REVIEW ISSUE, ,. November 1 FILE COPY TABLE OF CONTENTS Document Pages 00000 Cover Page 1 00003 Table of Contents 1 - 03 00004 List of Drawings 1 BIDDING & CONTRACT CONDITIONS PROVIDED BY OWNER DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REOUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 1 - 03 01015 Scheduling 1 01040 Project Coordination 1 - 06 01045 Cutting and Patching 1 - 03 01050 Field Engineering - 1 - 02 01095 Definitions and Standards 1 - 04 01200 Project Meetings 1 - 06 01300 Submittals 1 - 08 01400 Quality Control Services 1 - 04 01500 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 1 - 06 01600 Materials and Equipment 1 - 04 01700 Project Closeout 1 - 07 01720 Project Record Documents 1 - 04 01740 Warranties 1 - 05 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02070 Selective Demolition 1 - 04 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 1 - 21 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY - NOT USED DIVISION 5 - METAL 05400 Cold- Formed Metal Framing 1 - 09 05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 1 - 02 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL TABLE OF CONTENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 00003 - 1 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Document Pages 06100 Rough Carpentry 1 - 09 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 1 - 04 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 1 - 04 07901 Joint Sealants 1 - 11 DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS 08310 Access Doors 1 - 04 08340 Overhead Coiling Grilles 1 - 04 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 1 - 13 08710 Door Hardware 1 - 06 08800 Glazing 1 - 14 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies 1 - 16 09300 Ceramic Tile 1 - 09 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 1 - 07 09660 Resilient Base 1 - 02 09680 Carpeting 1 - 05 09900 Painting 1 - 10 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES - NOT USED DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - NOT USED DIVISION 12 - FURNISHING - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIALTIES - NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 1 - 03 15300 Fire Suppression System 1 - 12 15600 HVAC Systems 1 - 04 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL TABLE OF CONTENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 00003 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Document Pages DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 Basic Materials and Methods 1 - 15 16500 Lighting 1 - 03 16600 Special Systems 1 - 04 END OF DOCUMENT SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL TABLE OF CONTENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 00003 - 3 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS: Sheet Title LIST OF DRAWINGS A -0. Cover, Index, Abbreviations, Notes, and Location Map A -1 Second Level Reference Plan and Exterior Elevations A -2 Enlarged Floor and Ceiling Plans A -3 Wall Sections A -4 Details and Door Schedule ME -1 Mechanical and Electrical Plans OTHER DOCUMENTS: PROJECT MANUAL END OF DOCUMENT 00004 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL LIST OF DRAWINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 00004 -1 SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Project: Demolition and construction associated with a new second level mall entry and second level exterior entry into the Sears Retail Store located at the Westfield South center Mall in Tukwila, Washington. Work includes some interior finish including limited electrical, mechanical and fire protection work. ARCHITECT: Robert S. Chafee S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 South Ulster Street Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 B. The Work: 1. Alteration of an existing 3 -story Sears department store including, but not limited to selective demolition, architectural features & storefronts, interior partitions, interior finishes, mechanical systems, fire protection system, electrical power & lighting systems. a. Store fixturing work, as identified in Section 01040, is by the Owner. 1.3 COORDINATION A. See Instruction to Bidders, General Conditions, and Section 01040 for the following: 1. Items noted to be furnished and installed by the Owner or Mall. 2. Items noted to be furnished by the Owner or Mall for installation and final connections by the Contractor. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SUMMARY OF WORK 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01010 - 1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Limit use of the premises & construction activities to areas designated. 1. Confine operations to areas of work and other designated areas. Portions of the project beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. 2. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner and the Owner's employees at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. 3. Contractors cannot locate offices within the building at any time. B. Prior to beginning work, photograph existing conditions. 1. At end of work return staging areas and disturbed areas to original condition. 2. Comply with requirements of Section 01500. 1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY A. Beneficial Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy, and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials as required to allow Owner's fixturing and merchandise operations. 2. If space turned over to the Owner for occupancy is not complete and accepted by the Owner at time of start of fixturing the Contractor shall accomplish the completion of contract work using methods, techniques and scheduling that do not interfere, or create obstacles with Owner's fixturing work. Unfinished contract work shall be accomplished as expeditiously as possible, in accordance with a schedule approved by the Owner. 1.6 DOCUMENTS PROVIDED BY THE ARCHITECT A. Architect will provide to the Contractor two sets of prints; one bound, and one unbound copy of Project Manual and Addenda. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SUMMARY OF WORK NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01010 - 2 B. During construction the Architect will provide the same number of documents related to Bulletins and Change Orders. C. The Contractor shall make any sets required for sub - contractors and suppliers at their expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable.) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable.) END OF SECTION 01010 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SUMMARY OF WORK 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01010 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 L SECTION 01015 - SCHEDULING PART l - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTORS SCHEDULE A. Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar chart "Contractors Schedule." 1. Submit within 30 days of notice to proceed. No payment to the General Contractor will be processed until the Contractors Schedule is submitted and approved by Sears. 2. Schedule shall be submitted to the Architect, Sears, and Mall for review and agreement. 3. Coordinate schedule dates with Mall construction. 4. Schedule shall be updated on a monthly basis to coincide with date of application for payment and submitted with the application for payment. 5. Anticipated start of construction is February 4, 2008. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) END OF SECTION 01015 SCHEDULING 01015 - 1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for Project Coordination including, but not necessarily limited to : 1. Coordination. 2. Administrative and Supervisory Personnel. 3. General Installation Provisions. 4. Cleaning and Protection. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01015 "Schedules" - Construction Schedule 2. Section 01200 Project Meetings 3. Section 01300 Submittals 4. Section 01700 "Project Closeout" requirements for final cleaning. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. Coordinate the work with Separate Contractors retained by the Owner and Mall and coordinate the alarm systems installation (contracted by Owner) similar to the way he does with his own subcontractors. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS C. Coordinate with the Owner for Owner's and Mall's furnished equipment and Owner's Fixturing Operations. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and Sir ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: tar 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project Close -out activities. 6. Application for licenses, permits and any Certificates of Occupancy required. 7. Coordination of activities with inspection and testing companies. 8. Developer or Mall Owner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS lip Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections. A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off -site by separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. B. Comply with requirements contained in Section 01300 "Submittals." C. Staff Names: Submit with bid a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers. 1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, and the temporary field office. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MAIL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 ibr 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 2 2A COORDINATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Owner Furnished Equipment. The Owner will furnish and deliver to the project site equipment and materials listed in the Owner's Equipment Matrix. The Contractor is responsible for providing date needed if different than indicated in schedule (date of arrival), receiving, unloading, storing, protecting and installing the material and equipment listed. Contractor shall provide all related utilities, mechanical, electrical and cable work needed for the completeness of the system. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 3 Ire a Owner's Equipment Furnished and Installed by Owner Furnished by Owner, Installed by Source and Connected by Contractor Furnished by Owner's, Installed and Connected by Contractor Remarks *Carpeting & Carpet Wall Base X (SIC)* *Entrance Vestibule Mats X *Store Fixtures X *Sales Area Demountable Partition System X First Level Light Boxes X Furnished and installed by Mall — electrical power by (MEC) * *. Light Fixtures and Exit Signs Per List In Electrical Drawings Furnished and installed by Contractor. (Mall entry by (MEC)). (Exterior Entry by (SIC) except for exterior light fixtures by (MEC)). Lamps for Light Fixture Furnished and installed by Contractor — see above. *Exterior and Mall Signs X Mall to provide plywood backing. Refer to electrical drawings for power requirements. (MEC) Note: Exact location of rough in electrical by Sears contractor is critical. Sales Area Floor Ceramic Tile X Floor prep materials by Contractor (SIC) including setting and grout materials and vinyl base furnished and installed by Sears Contractor. OM tur imi h. L Iwo Ire v Owner's Equipment Matrix —All the equipment not listed below is to be furnished and *(SIC) = Sears Interior Contractor * *(MEC) = Mall/Entry Contractor SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION 11.10 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Installer of each component shall inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at mounting heights to comply with the state accessibility code or ADA criteria for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWIL.A, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 5 L Oro low boo ensure operability without damaging effects. h "' C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but not limited to, the following: Storm Water Degradation Excessive static or dynamic loading. Excessive internal or external pressures. Excessively high or low temperatures. Thermal shock. Excessively high or low humidity. Air contamination or pollution. Water or ice. Solvents. Chemicals. Lights. Radiation. Puncture. Abrasion. Heavy traffic. Soiling, staining and corrosion. Bacteria. Rodent and insect infestation. Combustion. High speed operation. Improper lubrication. Unusual wear or other misuse. irt Contact between incompatible materials. Destructive testing. Misalignment. bpi Excessive weathering. Unprotected weathering. Improper shipping or handling. Theft. Vandalism. r.. r• END OF SECTION 01040 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 6 SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Documents: 1. Sears General and Special Conditions and other Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections. A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is required before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal: B. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed. C. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements. D. List products to be used and entities that will perform work. E. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CUTTING AND PATCHING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01045 - 1 F. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out -of- service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. G. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. H. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architect's right to require later complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load - carrying capacity or load - deflection ratio. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements for safety related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. A. For patching use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CUTTING AND PATCHING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01045 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. END OF SECTION 01045 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CUTTING AND PATCHING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01045 - 3 ly A. Layout of Work - Developer shall furnish only basic reference lines and bench marks indicated on the drawings to establish location of the structure. Contractor shall lay out the construction site and correctly establish all lines, levels, grades and position of all parts of the work, and shall be responsible for their accurate and proper correlation with reference lines, monuments, and datum established by developer. Such monuments and datum as may be set by developer shall be carefully preserved by Contractor, and if displaced shall be replaced at the expense of Contractor. Ire B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference bur points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. bow in SECTION 01 050 - FIELD ENGINEERING PART l - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1_2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field - engineering services including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Damage surveys. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIELD ENGINEERING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01050 - 1 C. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. D. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. 3.2 PERFORMANCE A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb. B. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work. END OF SECTION 01050 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIELD ENGINEERING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWI A, WASHINGTON) 01050 - 2 it SECTION 01095 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS PART l - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contract Documents are complimentary. Work indicated or described in any one of the Contract Documents shall be provided even though not indicated or described elsewhere. If any inconsistency shall occur between the Contract Documents, the better quality or greater quantity shall be provided, unless otherwise directed in writing by the Architect. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions. B. Indicated refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the drawings, or other paragraphs or schedules in specifications, and similar requirements in Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown ", "noted ", "scheduled" and "specified" are used, it is to help locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended except as specifically noted. C. Directed: Terms such as "directed ", "requested ", "authorized ", "selected ", "approved ", "required" and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect ", "requested by the Architect ", and similar phrases. 1. However, no implied meaning shall be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. D. No Exception Taken: The term "no exception taken ", where used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the responsibilities and duties of the Architect stated in General and Supplementary Conditions. Such action shall not release the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill Contract Document requirements, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 tN 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01095 - 1 E. Regulation: The term "regulations" includes laws, statutes, ordinances and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the work, whether lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction or not. F. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project site including the actual unloading, unpacking, storing, assembly, erection, utility connections, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations. H. Provide: The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. Installer: An installer is an entity engaged by the Contractor either as an employee, subcontractor or sub - subcontractor for performance of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term "experienced ", when used with the term "installer ", means having a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, and familiar with the precautions required, and has complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. J. Testing Laboratories: A "testing laboratory" is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 1.4 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Format: These specifications are organized into divisions and sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16- division format and the MASTERFORMAT numbering system. B. Assignment of Specialists: The specification requires that certain specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the Contractor. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01095 - 2 1s bib 1. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. 2. Trades: Use of titles such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter ". It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where Contract Documents include more stringent r requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into Contract Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Where compliance with an industry standard is required, comply with standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, the most stringent requirement will be enforced. Refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties as to which quality level is more stringent to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. irt D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the Encyclopedia of Associations, published by Gale Research Company, available in most libraries. F. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government standard or specification - producing agencies are frequently abbreviated. The acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standard or '"" specification- producing agencies of the federal government. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 4. 07 -164 (TUKWIL.A, WASHINGTON) 01095 - 3 If 1.6 GOVERNING REGULATIONS /AUTHORITIES A. The Architect has contacted authorities having jurisdiction where necessary to obtain information necessary for the preparation of Contract Documents; that information may or may not be of significance to the Contractor. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01095 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01095 - 4 SECTION 01 200 - PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Site Mobilization/Preconstruction conference. 2. Preinstallation conferences. 3. Progress meetings. 4. Coordination meetings. B. Related Sections: 1. Division l Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating project meetings with other construction activities. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. The Owner will schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Contractor. The conference will be held at the Project Site or another location designated by the Owner. The Owner's Representative will conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, the Architect, Testing and Inspection Agency, the Contractor and its Project Superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, and other concerned parties may attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: 1. Designation of responsible personnel and assignments. (Communications chain) SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 1 2. Owner Contractor Agreement Status. 3. Developers responsibilities and representative. 4. Protection of existing to remain, staff and customers 5. Review conditions to start construction. 6. Testing requirements and procedures. 7. Permits. 8. Use of the premises. 9. Staging Area. 10. Parking availability. 11. Office, work, and storage areas. 12. Signage - Identification & Control. 13. Proposed construction schedule. 14. Critical work sequencing. (Identify milestones) 15. Distribution of Contract Documents. 16. Establish submittal schedules and logs. 17. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 18. Project meeting schedule. 19. Preparation of record documents. 20. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 21. Owner furnished equipment and materials. 22. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 23. Procedures for processing field decisions, Change Orders, and establishing costs of Change Orders. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS 07 -164 (TUKWIL A, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 24. Working hours. 25. Housekeeping. 26. Safety procedures. 27. First aid. 28. Security. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. The Contractor shall conduct preinstallation conferences at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. See individual sections for particular preinstallation conferences. B. Attendees: Contractor, the Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Owner's Project Representative and the Architect of scheduled meeting dates at least 10 working days in advance. 1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality- control samples. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07-164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 3 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. 1. Manufacturer's recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities. q. Space and access limitations. r. Governing regulations. s. Safety. t. Inspection and testing requirements. u. Required performance results. v. Recording requirements. w. Protection. 2. The Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner, the Architect and attendees. 3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. A. The Contractor shall conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at intervals established at the preconstruction meeting. Notify the Owner, and the Architect of scheduled meeting dates, a minimum of ten working days in advance. Coordinate dates of some meetings to coincide with preparation of the payment request. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 boo Ira Iwo ..r B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Contractor, the Owner and the Architect, each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: a. Interface requirements. b. Time. c. Sequences. d. Status of submittals. e. Deliveries. f. Off -site fabrication problems. g. Access. h. Site utilization. i. Temporary facilities and services. j. Hours of work. k. Hazards and risks. 1. Housekeeping. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 5 m. Quality and work standards. n. Change Orders. o. Documentation of information for payment requests. D. Reporting: No later than 5 days after each meeting, the Contractor shall distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. 1. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.6 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. The Contractor shall conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties involved, but not less than semi- monthly. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special preinstallation meetings. B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the construction activities involved. C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. D. Notify the Owner's project representative and the Architect a minimum of ten working days in advance of coordination meetings. The Owner and the Architect reserves the right to attend coordination meetings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01200 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 6 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 L li SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS PART l - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the work, including: 1. Submittal schedule. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Product data. 4. Samples. 5. Mock -Ups. B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division-1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 1. Permits. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Applications for payment. 4. Pei iv, ,,,a„ce and payment bonds. 5. Insurance certificates. 6. Evidence that required governmental fees have been paid. 7. List of subcontractors. 8. Sworn statements and lien waivers. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01015 Schedules, for Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Owner's Representative reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 3. Processing: Allow sufficient delivery and review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow ten working days for each review. Allow additional time for delivery and if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. b. No extension of Contract time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Owner's Representative sufficiently in advance of the work to permit processing. B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MAIL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) SUBMITTALS 013 - 2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Owner's Representative. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submittals received for sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. D. Contractor's Submittal Review: l . Each submission shall bear the Contractor's review stamp attesting to the Contractor's review of the submission for conformance to Contract requirements and coordination with other work. 2. Omission of Contractor's executed review stamp will be cause for rejection by the Owner's Representative and submission will be returned to Contractor. 1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. After development and acceptance, by Sears and its consultants, of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule 15 working days prior to the first submittal date. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list of products as well as the Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during the first 90 days of construction. Provide the following information: a. Scheduled date for each submittal package and number of drawing in each package. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the part of the work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal. g. Scheduled date for Owner's Representative final release or approval. B. Distribution: Following response to the proposed submittal schedule and mutual acceptance, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Sears, subcontractors, and •.. other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the work and are no longer involved in construction activities. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) SUBMITTALS 01300 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 law C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings, Include, but not limited to, the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 1.6 PRODUCT DATA SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) a. All Submittals: Submit one correctable translucent reproducible print and two blue- or black -line print for the Architect's review; the reproducible print will be returned with notations. b. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction. A. Collect product data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where product data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings ". 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed product data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. B. Submittals: Submit three (3) copies of each required submittal; submit additional copies required for maintenance manuals. The Owner's Representative will return one, marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. 1. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 5 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 C. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1.7 SAMPLES 1. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of product data applicable is in the installer's possession. 2. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of product data in connection with construction. A. Submit full -size, fully fabricated samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern. 1. Mount, display, or package samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. 2. Submit samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect's mark indicating selection and other action. Yr Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than three) that show approximate limits of the variations. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. r`" Yr 3. Preliminary Submittals: Where samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full ' set of choices for the material or product. 4. Submittals: Except for samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit two (2) sets; one will be returned marked with the action taken. .. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SUBMITTALS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01300 - 6 `' In IN owl 5. Maintain sets of samples, as returned, at the Project site for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. lbw Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets of subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Ir. 1.8 MOCK -UPS A. See individual technical sections for required mock -ups. B. Erect where directed by Architect and leave in place until directed to be removed by Architect. C. Restore mock -up area to original condition. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting and finishing, in quantities specified for product data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturer's certificate to Architect for review, in quantities specified for product data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.11 JURISDICTIONAL DOCUMENTS SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MAIL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) SUBMITTALS 01300 — 7 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, certificates of occupancy, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the work. 1.12 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. With each applications for payment, submit digital photographs via e-mail to Owner showing progress of construction within three days from the day the photos are taken. Photographs: Provide 15 different views, half of them taken from approximately the same points to be able to determine the progress from each submittal to the next. C. Identify photographs with date, time, orientation and project identification. 1.13 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. 2. Submittals not presented in conformance with the requirements of this Section will be returned noted "Not Accepted ". B. B. Action Stamp: The Owner's Representative will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self - explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked as follows to indicate the action taken: PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) END OF SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 8 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 r SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality- control services. B. Quality- control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. 1. Specific quality- control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures. a. Requirements in particular Sections identify the entity responsible for quality control services. 2. Inspections, tests, and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality- control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality- control services required by the Architect, Sears, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01400 - 1 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality - control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. 1. The Owner will employ and pay an Independent Inspection and Testing Agency to perform specified quality control services; identified in particular Sections. 2. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements. B. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Owner's Project Manager, the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections. A. The independent testing agency will submit a certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service to Owner's Project Manager, the Architect, and the Contractor, in duplicate. 1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01400 - 2 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting. B. Distribution of field observation and test reports. 1. One (1) copy of each report and back -up, to the Architect and Structural Engineer as soon as the report is completed. 2. One (1) copy of each report and back -up, to the Contractor as soon as the report �., is completed. 3. One (1) copy of each report and back -up, to the Owner's Project Manager. ►. Reports to the Owner shall be compiled and forwarded once a month accompanied by an invoice (in triplicate) for services performed. In case any tests fail to come up to required - specified results, one (1) additional copy of the report shall be forwarded immediately to the Owner. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01400 - 3 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing any additional quality control services other than these performed by the Owner's independent consultant. The Contractor is not permitted to use the Owner's Consultant. Reports of the Contractor's testing services shall be distributed in the same manner as for the Owner's consultant. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION B. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. END OF SECTION 01400 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01400 - 4 SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY w '"' A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities, including temporary utilities, controls, support facilities, and security and protection. B. Temporary utilities required include but are not limited to, the following: 1. Telephone, facsimile and E -Mail service. C. Temporary construction and support facilities required include but are not limited to: 0 1. Staging area. 2. Construction Offices. 3. Temporary heat. 4. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. 5. Temporary enclosures. 6. Hoists and temporary elevator use. ktai 7. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards. 6.0 8. Waste disposal services. 9. Rodent and pest control. boo 10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. 1.. D. Security and protection facilities required include but are not limited to: `,• 1. Temporary fire protection. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 1 hs 2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 3. Temporary enclosure wall around work area to prevent access by unauthorized personnel and transmission of dust or debris to customers /staff occupied areas. Construction and location as approved by owner & local jurisdictional authority. 4. Environmental protection. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections. A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules. 4. Environmental protection regulations. B. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on -site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CONSTRUCTION FACIL TIES 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 .r Yr 0 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Telephone, Facsimile and E -Mail Service: Contractor shall provide and pay for telephone line services, limited however, to business calls made by the Owner or their representatives. C. Janitorial Services: Contractor shall provide adequate janitorial service incident to the temporary facilities required herein. D. Contractor's Office and Storage: Contractor shall provide and maintain such office and storage facilities on the site as required for the proper conduct of the work. The type of structure(s) and location thereof must be approved by the Owner. E. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self - contained, single- occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass - fiber- reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. F. Drinking Water: Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary drinking water facilities in compliance with regulations of the governing agency. G. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. H. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand - carried, portable, UL- rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand - carried, portable, UL rated, Class ABC, dry chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA- recommended classes for the exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. I. Plant and Equipment: The Contractor shall provide, install, maintain, and operate a complete and adequate plant for the handling, execution, disposal and distribution of all material and equipment required for the proper and timely performance of all work connected with the contract. The location, arrangement and type of plant and equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Owner and such thereof as may be deemed by him to be sufficient. Defective or otherwise unsuited plant and equipment, for the proper performance of the work shall, when directed by Owner, be promptly dismantled and removed from the site by Contractor. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Staging Area: Staging area shall be maintained by Contractor. Contractor shall give back staging area to Developer in the original condition. B. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Sears. C. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities, for curing or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures on high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. D. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's needs. E. Scaffolding, Staging, Etc.: Contractor and each sub - contractor shall be responsible for providing scaffolding, staging, planking, runways, guard rails, and other temporary construction necessary in the proper performance of his particular part or parts of the contract. This requirement shall not be construed as precluding the joint use of such temporary construction, but shall require that the Contractor and each SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 w sub - contractor specifically arrange for such joint use if such is to be the case. All temporary construction included herein shall be in compliance with all laws, rules, and regulations of the Industrial Safety and Accident Commission, the insurance carriers, local ordinances, and other authorities of competent jurisdiction. F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. 1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Interior side temporary enclosure at both entries by Sears Interior Contractor (SIC). G. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. H. Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Employ this service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. 3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire- protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire- protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations." B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MAIL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 5 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. D. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and avoid the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise - making tools and equipment to hours that will avoid complaints from persons or firms near the site. 3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. B. Termination and Removal: Unless the Owner's Representative requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Restore staging area to conditions present at the beginning of the work. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. END OF SECTION 01500 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MAIL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 07 -164 (TUKWIIA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 6 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 0 SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT `' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Imo lbw A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self - explanatory and have well- recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of iho similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed m the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. lbw A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section -01095 "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the applicability of industry standards to products specified. 2. Division 1 Section -01300 "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule Section -01015 "Scheduling" and the Submittal Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01600 - 1 3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to the Owner and Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed. 1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals. 2. Initial Submittal: Within 15 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of an initial product list. a. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract period. 3. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the completed product list. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements. 4. Owner Representative's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 10 working day of receipt of the completed product list. No response within this period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Provide products of the same kind from a single source. B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with other products selected. 1. Each prime contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods that are compatible with products and construction methods of other prime or separate contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between prime contractors over concurrently selectable, but incompatible products, the Architect will determine which products shall be retained and which are incompatible and must be replaced. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01600 - 2 C. No substitutions of materials, systems or assemblies will be permitted after award of the Contract. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide new products that comply with the Contract Documents, and that are undamaged. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01600 - 3 B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 3. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. 4. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 5. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified. 6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established color or sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches the established color or matches satisfactorily. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage .,. and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 01600 `r SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01600 - 4 �" low iho SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. L2 SUMMARY A. The Architect will schedule substantial completion inspections and final acceptance inspections for of the work, or designated portions, thereof, identified by the Owner. B. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning. 6. Spare parts and maintenance materials. C. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions -2 through -16. D. Requirements for Project Record Documents are included in Section 01720. L3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before scheduled inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall complete the following: (List exceptions in the request.) 1. In the Application for payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date for Substantial Completion, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MAIL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 1 a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance change -over requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents as required by each section of these specifications (HVAC, BAS, EIFS, etc.). 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 6. Make final change -over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. 7. Complete start-up testing of systems and instruction of Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock -ups, and similar elements. 8. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch -up painting. 9. Touch -up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. 10. Provide a list of items to be corrected or resolved prior to final completion. 11. Consent of Surety to Release Final Payment [applicable only when part of contract]. 12. Waivers of Lien from Contractor and all sub - contractors and material supplier. 13. Certificate of Occupancy as issued by the governing authority. 14. Contractor's 1 -year warranty with applicable extensions as required for other work or trades. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 2 6. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. �. tor tam 1f 15. Certificate of Substantial Completion fully executed establishing the substantial completion date. The substantial completion date to be the commencement date of all warranties, guarantees, etc. trim 16. Copy of all shop drawings indicating Contractor's approval. 17. Copy of all submittal data indicating Contractor's approval. 18. Information or data on all approved or selected samples. This pertains to the product name and number of floor tile, ceiling tile, wall tile, paint, etc. and where each product may be obtained. 19. Confirmation of Contractor conducted instructions on electrical systems as well as building components with moving parts such as automatic doors, electric operated doors, access panels, etc. Contractor shall prepare video of instruction conducted and/or obtain from authorized Owner's representative a signed acknowledgment that instructions have been given according to specifications. 20. List of all sub - contractors and major material suppliers indicating trade or work responsibility. Also provide the address, phone number and name of contact person for emergencies and/or business matters. 21. Paint colors and manufacturers (interior and exterior). B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request by the Contractor for inspection, the Owner and the Owner's Representative will either jointly proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Owner's Representative will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. At any designated portion of the work, the Owner's Representative and the Owner will conduct inspection when requested once only and assured in writing by the Contractor that the Work has been substantially completed. The her Contractor will be backcharged for any additional inspections and expenses relating thereto, and they will be deducted from Contractor's final payment. iwo 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Acceptance. 3. No partial inspections of any designated portion of the work will be made. lit l SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 3 L4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before scheduled final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, the Contractor shall complete the following: (List exceptions in the request.) 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Owner's Representative substantial completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 8. Certify in writing to the Owner's Representative that: a. Contract Documents have been reviewed. b. Work has been inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents. c. Work has been completed for accordance with the Contract Documents. d. Equipment and systems have been tested as required, and are operational. e. Work is completed and ready for Final Review. 9. Submit final Waivers of Lien from Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 4 10. Submit 2 copies of final inspection by authorities of governing jurisdication. 11. The Owner's Representative will make a "Final Review" to verify status of completion. 12. Should the Owner's Representative determine that the Work is incomplete or defective: a. The Owner's Representative promptly will so notify the Contractor, in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. b. Remedy the deficiencies promptly, and notify the Owner's Representative when ready for re- review. B. Reinspection Procedure: The Owner's Representative and the Owner will jointly reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from Substantial Completion inspection, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Owner and the Architect. C. When the Owner's Representative determines that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he will promptly process the final Certificate for Payment. Final Certification will not be made until all Change Orders and requests for adjustments have been settled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans and Inspection Reports 4. Spare parts and materials. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 5 5. Tools. 6. Lubricants. 7. Fuels. 8. Identification systems. 9. Control sequences. 10. Hazards. 11. Cleaning. 12. Warranties and bonds. 13. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Start-up. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions. B. Final Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions, cleaning materials and cleaning products. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 6 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion. a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision - obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard - surfaced finishes to a dust -free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth even - textured surface. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection, and rid the Project of rodents, insects and other pests. D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Landlord's or Sears property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. END OF SECTION 01700 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 7 SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1_2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1. Throughout progress of the Work, maintain an accurate record of the following on the most appropriate sheet of the Record Document Job Set: a. Significant changes made during the construction. b. Significant detail not shown in the original Contract Documents. c. The location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in building structures, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. d. Such other as -built information as directed. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01050, Field Engineering. 2. Section 01300, Submittals. 3. Section 01700, Project Closeout. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections. A. Submit Final Record Documents to Architect prior to or concurrent with the request for Final Payment. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accuracy of records: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT. RECORD DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01720 - 1 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and prior entries on each page Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other Documents where such entry is required to show the change properly, including SWAPPP storm water pollution prevention plans.. im 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. in • B. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Maintain the job set of Record documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the Work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record documents. B. In the event of loss of record data, use means necessary to again secure the data to the Architect's approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. Such means shall include, if necessary in the opinion of the Architect, removal and replacement of concealing materials. 2. In such case, provide replacements to the standards originally required by the Contract Documents. 2.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. A. Job set: Promptly following receipt of the Owner's Notice to Proceed reserve one complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract for documentation use, marking these "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET ". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET A. Preservation: 1. Devise a suitable method for protecting the job set to the approval of the Architect. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01720 - 2 2. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by the Architect, until start of transfer of data to final Project Record Documents. B. Making entries on Drawings: 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. C. Make entries in the pertinent other Documents as approved by the Architect. D. Conversion of schematic layouts: 1. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items, is shown schematically and is not intended to portray precise physical layout. a. Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the Architect's approval. b. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which area shown only schematically on the Drawings. 2. Show on the job set of Record Documents, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the centerline of each run of items such as are described above, measured from visible and accessible features of the existing building. a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "cast iron drain," "galv. water," and the like. b. Shown, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item ( "under slab," in ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like). c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the Specifications. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01720 - 3 3.2 FINAL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Transfer of data to Drawings. 1. Carefully transfer change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings to the corresponding transparencies, coordinating the changes as required. 2. Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other Drawing a full description of changes made during construction, and the actual location of items described above. 3. Call attention to each entry by drawings a "cloud" around the area or areas affected. 4. Make changes neatly, consistently, and with the proper media to assure longevity and clear reproduction. B. Transfer of data to other Documents: 1. If the Documents other than Drawings have been kept clean during progress of the Work, and if entries thereon have been orderly to the approval of the Architect, the job set of those Documents other than Drawings will be accepted as final Record Documents. 2. If any such Document is not so approved by the Architect, secure a new copy of that Document from the Architect at the Architect's usual charge for reproduction and handling, and carefully transfer the change data to the new copy to the approval of the Architect. C. Review and submittal: 1. Submit the completed set of Project Record Documents to the Architect for review. 2. Participate in review meetings as required. 3. Make required changes and promptly deliver the final Project Record Documents to the Architect. END OF SECTION 01720 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01720 - 4 SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to Article 13.3 of the General Conditions. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies procedures for submitting warranties. 2. Division 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to the Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. L3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 - 1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 L 1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether The Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner Recourse: Expressed warranties made to Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.5 SUBMITTALS Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections. A. Submit written warranties to The Owner prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 - 2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 period, submit properly executed warranties to the Owner within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. C. Forms for special warranties are included at the end of individual Sections. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile 3 copies of each required warranty properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -duty, commercial - quality, durable 3 -ring, vinyl - covered loose -leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8Y2 -by -11 -inch (115 -by- 280 -mm) paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of the Contractor. 3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 A. The Contractor shall provide a written guarantee against all defects in materials or workmanship of all trades under the Contract. This guarantee shall be for a period of twelve (12) months, unless noted to be longer, or for the period stipulated in the various specification sections where such bonds, warranties, or guarantees are for periods longer than twelve (12) months. This period shall commence as stated herein upon Substantial Completion. B. The Contractor shall obtain from his subcontractors and shall deliver to the Owner in writing all individual trade bonds, warranties or guarantees specified under the various trade sections of the Specifications. C. Supplementing the above, the guarantee and warranty period for mechanical and electrical equipment or any other mechanical contrivance shall commence from the date the equipment is first placed in continued service. In no case shall the guarantee period start date precede the date of Substantial Completion. Mechanical and/or electrical equipment placed into service for the benefit of the Contractor shall not constitute continued service. As a condition of formal acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor, at his expense, must place same in first class operating condition as if it had not been used. The date of continued service will be determined from lease periods set forth in the lease agreements for the building. D. Should any defects develop in contract work within specified periods due to defects in materials and/or workmanship (exclusive of damage due to the Owner's improper maintenance or operation), the Contractor shall make repairs and perform all necessary work to correct defective work, as approved by the Architect. The Contractor shall execute such repairs and corrective work within five (5) days, or sooner if so specified in the trade Sections, after written notice to Contractor by the Owner, and the Contractor shall bear all costs in connection therewith. The Owner will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. E. Should any defects develop in the contract work that constitutes an emergency, the Contractor shall visit the site within twenty -four (24) hours of notification by Owner of the deficiency and begin emergency repairs within that period. The Owner shall promptly notify the Contractor and shall take available measures to minimize any damage to the building and contents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of all damages to the building and contents. F. In Contractor fails to do corrective guarantee work so ordered, the Owner may have work done by others, and the Owner may charge the cost thereof against monies retained pursuant to the Contract. If said retained monies are insufficient to pay such cost, or if no money is available, the Contractor and/or his sureties shall pay Owner the entire balance of the cost of such work. G. During the guarantee period, the Contractors shall assign a person and an alternate person to administer the guarantee. The Contractor shall provide and keep current a SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 list of names, addresses and telephone numbers of the administrators, where they can be reached during and after business hours. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01740 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 - 5 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 top a. boo boo w boo boo boo SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the provisions of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of portions of exterior walls, interior flooring, ceilings and walls and finishes, lighting, fire sprinkler heads and other interior work as indicated on Drawings. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00700 "General Conditions ": Provisions regarding discovery of hazardous materials including asbestos. B. Section 01700 "Contract Closeout ": Project record documents. L4 REFERENCES A. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of areas to be demolished. 1. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's operations. Provide minimum of ninety -six (96) hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's normal operations. 2. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 02070 - 1 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, or pollution. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 11 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements are as show on Drawings. B. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to the Owner before disturbing existing installation. C. Prior to beginning work of this Section inspect areas in which work will be performed. Photograph existing conditions of finished surfaces, equipment, or surrounding areas which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; file documentation with Owner's Representative prior to beginning work. 1. Beginning of selective demolition work means Contractor accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Erect and maintain weatherproof and secure closures for exterior openings with provision for emergency exiting. 1. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes, noise, and smoke to provide for Owner occupancy. B. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection required to protect and provide safe passage of Owner's personnel to and from building. Exits from the building must be maintained at all times. C. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered. D. Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility services within demolition areas. 1. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and indicate capping locations on Project Record Documents. 3.3 DEMOLITION - GENERAL SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 02070 - 2 tfto L L L A. Perform selective demolition work in systematic, orderly, and careful manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools. Do not use power -driven impact tools. B. Distribute demolition equipment throughout area, and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. C. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered. D. Do not burn or bury materials on site. E. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave areas of work in clean condition. 3.4 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. Items for re -use remain the property of the Owner. Verify items prior to removal and protect from damage. Notify Architect prior to removal and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal. 3.5 UTILITY SERVICE A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, and protect against damage during demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied areas except when authorized by the Owner and utility company. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities. 3.6 EXPLOSIVES A. Use of explosives is not permitted. 3.7 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. Remove, handle, and dispose of hazardous materials encountered in a safe manner complying with local regulations. B. For materials containing or likely to contain asbestos or PCB, refer to the General SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 02070 - 3 Conditions. 3_8 ASBESTOS A. A survey has been made to determine the existence of asbestos. Notify Owner if the existence of asbestos is suspected for inspection and removal. Comply with all required regulations. Coordinate with asbestos removal activities provided by the Owner. 19 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site. B. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 3.10 CLEAN -UP AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and remaining demolished materials from site. Remove protection and leave interior rooms broom clean. B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that indicated or required. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION 02070 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 02070 - 4 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cast -in -place concrete including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures and finishes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting ". 3. ACI 306 "Cold Weather Concreting ". 4. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection ". 5. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ". 6. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork ". Concrete reinforcing slab institute, "Manual of Standard Practice ". 7. ACI 302.IR "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction ". 8. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Concrete Testing Service: Owner will engage a testing laboratory to perform material evaluation tests and to examine concrete construction. 1. Provide access to mixing plant and project site. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 1 C. When inspections or test results indicate that the concrete does not meet specified criteria, retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, color finish materials, and others as requested by Design Engineer. C. Design Mixes D. Shop Drawings for Reinforcement: Prepared by registered Professional Engineer licensed in the state of the project's location, for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP - 66 "ACI Detailing Manual" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. 1. Show construction joints and pour sequences. E. Laboratory Test Reports: For concrete materials and mix design tests. F. Materials Certificates: Provide materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Structural Engineer. Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and fabricator certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. 1. Provide admixture manufactures written certification for each admixture used, that it contains no oxygenation, or has no more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. G. Concrete delivery receipts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal - framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel -type materials to provide full- depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 2 r • number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form material of sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly - placed concrete without bow or deflection. 1. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS -1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood ", Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edge - sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. Iav B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form- coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 mg/1 that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. D. Form Ties: Factory- fabricated, adjustable- length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 11/2 inches to exposed face. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS 6 A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel. 1. Provide prefabricated sheets. Roll type not permitted. D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs -on- grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are plastic protected l '" (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2). 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN —PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 3 all Sieve % Passing No. 4 100 No. 8 92 No. 16 68 No. 39 43 No. 50 21 No. 100 6 A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless otherwise acceptable to Design Engineer. B. Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as iron sulphides, pyrite, marcasite, or ochre which can cause stains or exposed concrete surfaces. 2. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand, free from loam, clay lumps or other deleterious substances. Beach sand shall not be used. Washed river sand may be used provided it meets the requirements of ASTM C 33 and the following gradation: 3. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate, containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, as follows: a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank run gravel is not permitted. c. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be larger than one- fifth of the narrowest dimensions between forms, one -third of the depth of slabs, nor three - fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars or pretensioning tendons or post- tensioning ducts. d. Grading shall be approved by the engineer and shall be such that the grading shall be within the limits specified in Table 2, ASTM C 33. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 bw f tor low Iwo v Except for interior slabs on grade, retaining walls and slabs on metal deck: Interior slabs on grade, retaining walls and slabs on metal deck: Sieve % Passing Sieve % Passing 1'h" 100 1" 100 1" 95 -100 3 An 90 -100 '/s" 25 -60 3/8" 20 -55 No. 4 0 -10 No. 4 0 -10 No. 8 0 -05 No. 8 0 -05 r boo L L Iro air ego e. Supply of aggregates shall be from one source of supply to ensure uniformity in color, size and shape. 4. Water for washing aggregates, mixing, and curing shall be clean, fresh, free from oil, acid, organic matter or other deleterious substances. Provide water for curing that not contain impurities in sufficient amount to etch concrete surfaces, or cause discoloration to concrete indicated to remain exposed and unpainted. C. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330. D. Water: Drinkable and not detrimental to concrete. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Sika AER "; Sika Corp. b. "Micro -Air" Master Builders. c. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair "; W.R. Grace. d. "Air -Mix" or "Perma- Air "; Euclid Chemical Co. B. Water- Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 5 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Eucon WR -75 "; Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Pozzolith 322N "; Master Builders. c. "Plastocrete 160 "; Sika Chemical Corp. d. "Chemtard "; Chem - Masters Corp. e. "Prokete -N "; Prokete Industries, Inc. C. High -Range Water- Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Sikament 300 "; Sika Chemical Corp. b. "Eucon 37 "; Euclid Chemical Co. c. "Rheobuild "; Master Builders. d. "PSP "; Prokrete Industries, Inc. D. Water- Reducing, Accelerator Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Daraset "; W.R.Grace & Co. b. "Accelguard 80 "; Euclid Chemical Co. c. "Pozzutec 20 "; Master Builders. E. Water- Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Pozzolith R "; Master Builders. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 6 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 imw L L 1i b. "Eucon Retarder 75 "; Euclid Chemical Co. c. "Daratard -17 "; W.R. Grace. d. "Plastiment "; Sika Chemical Co. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Non - metallic, Non - shrink Grout: CRD -C 621, factory premixed grout. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Set Grout "; Master Builders. b. "Sonogrout"; Sonnebom- Rexford. c. "Euco -NS "; Euclid Chemical Corp. d. "Five Star Grout "; U.S. Grout Corp. B. Underlayment Compound: Free - flowing, self - leveling, pumpable, cement -based compound for applications from one inch thick to feathered edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "K -15 ", Ardex, Inc. b. "Flo Top ", Euclid Chemical Co. c. "Levelex ", L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Sonoflow, Sonnobom Div. ChemRex e. "Thoro Underlayment Self - Leveling ", Thoro System Products. C. Bonding Compound: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Euco Weld ", Euclid Chemical Co. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 7 b. "Weld- Crete ", Larsen Products Corp. c. "Everweld ", L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. "Daraweld C ", W.R. Grace & Co. e. "Homweld ", A.C. Horn, Inc. D. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two- component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type ", "Grade" and "Class" to suit project requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620 ", Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Epoxtite Binder 2390 ", A.C. Horn, Inc. c. "Epabond ", L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. "Concresive Liquid LPL ", Master Builders, Inc. e. "Sikadur 32 Hi- Mod ", Sika Corp. 2.6 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by laboratory trial batch method as specified in ACI 301. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Owner and the Structural Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used by the Owner for field quality control testing. B. Submit written reports to Structural Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 30 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by Structural Engineer. C. Design mixes to provide concrete with the following properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. 4000psi 28 -day compressive strength, regular weight; w/WC ratio, 0.44 maximum (non -air entrained), 0.35 maximum (air entrained). SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 8 D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by Structural Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Structural Engineer before using in work. E. Admixtures: 1. Use water - reducing admixture or high range water - reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. 2. Use non - chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 °F. 3. Use high -range water - reducing admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus -or -minus 11/2 percent within following limits: a. 5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 3 /4 inches maximum aggregate. F. Only use admixtures for water - reducing and set - control with Design Engineer's approval and in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed directions. G. Water- Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water - cement (W /C) ratios as follows: 1. Subjected to freezing and thawing; W/C 0.45. 2. Subjected to deicers /watertight; W/C 0.40. 3. Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers; W/C 0.40. 4. Floor slabs interior; W/C 0.50 or less. H. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 4 inches and not more than 6 inches. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST-1N-PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 9 3.2 FORMS 3. Concrete containing High -Range Water Reducing admixture (super - plasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after addition of admixture to site - verified 2 to 3 inches slump concrete. 4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 95 °F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1Y2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 95 °F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, inserts and vapor retarders with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shows, and to obtain accurate alignment, locations, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 10 1. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. If vapor retarder is damaged, repair to satisfaction of Inspecting Agency prior to placing concrete. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars ", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement for formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Structural Engineer. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 11 3.4 JOINTS position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install sheets of welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. F. Provide adequate time for inspection of formwork and reinforcing installation by concrete testing agency prior to depositing concrete. A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Structural Engineer. Pour sequencing and construction joint layout to be submitted, reviewed and approved by the Owner's Concrete Testing Agency. B. Provide keyways at least 11/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls and footings; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement and welded wire fabric across construction joints, except as otherwise indicated. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing, and to receive thru-wall flashings in outer face of concrete at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions. C. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean re -used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 12 ION Iwo ►r. ►r Iit B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form- coating compound before reinforcement is placed. C. Thin form- coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, amount, and under conditions of form- coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form- coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in -place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust- preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust stained steel formwork is not permitted. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. B. Comply with ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete ", and as herein specified. 1. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand- spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to penetrate rapidly the preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 13 reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. D. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures in compliance with ACI 306R and as herein specified. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 °F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 °F, and not more than 80 °F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. E. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305R and as herein specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 °F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water - soaked burlap if it becomes too hot so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 4. Use water - reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions. 3.8 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 . 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 14 holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding'/, inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to surface exposed to view, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement other than that created by the rubbing process. 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. B. Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture- retaining cover, by mono - molecular film forming compounds and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. C. Provide moisture curing by following methods: 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. y,,, 2. Use continuous water -fog spray. D. Provide moisture cover curing as follows: ww 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. E. Provide curing, compound as follows: 1. Apply specified curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within two hours and after surface SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 l,, 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 15 water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's direction. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete. F. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. G. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 °F for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard not to be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in -place concrete by testing field cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form facing material may be removed four days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close j oints. Align and SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 16 .r lbw hob 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Structural Engineer. 1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over '/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried. 2. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Structural Engineer. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Structural Engineer. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. ift• 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. v C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface r.., and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 17 sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non - reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Design Engineer. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch diameter, but cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3 /4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. D. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter when directed by Structural Engineer by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2'/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the Owner and Concrete Testing Agency and Structural Engineer for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. F. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Structural Engineer, Concrete Testing Agency and the Owner. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 18 L L ■■ .. in 5. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 9; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. over and above the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. a. When frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. 3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The Owner will employ and pay for a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports. 1. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete will include the following: A. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94 as noted below: 1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test of each truck load, at point of discharge. Additional tests, when concrete consistency exceeds maximum allowable slump by more than '/2 inches. 2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air - entrained concrete. 3. Concrete Temperature: Test each truck load, hourly and when air temperature is 40 °F (4 °C) and below, and when 80 °F (27 °C) and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. b. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., strength test may be waived by Structural Engineer if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. c. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 19 and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in- place concrete. d. Strength level of concrete will be considered unsatisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. A. Test results will be reported by the Concrete Testing Agency in writing to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28 -day tests. A. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device shall be performed when requested by the Structural Engineer but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. A. Additional Tests: The testing service shall make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Structural Engineer. Testing service will conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests and repairs when unacceptable concrete is verified. A. The Owner's testing agency will conduct floor flatness and level tests to assure compliance with specifications. A. Testing Agency will monitor floor slabs concrete curing, coloring, and hardening operations to assure compliance with the specifications. A. The Contractor will bear all costs for correcting conditions not meeting specified criteria and shall accomplish corrective measures within specified time constraints. L Yri END OF SECTION 03300 .. is SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 20 r SECTION 05400 - COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS loi A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior non -load bearing steel stud framing. 2. Interior load -bearing steel -stud framing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry" for exterior sheathing. 2. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum board and nonload- bearing metal -stud framing and ceiling- suspension assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of cold formed metal framing, accessory, and product specified. C. Shop drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold - formed metal framing, fabrication, fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachments to other units of Work. 1. For cold - formed metal framing indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for its preparation. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 1 D. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of cold- formed metal framing certifying that their products comply with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, and galvanized- coating thickness. 1. In lieu of mill certificates, submit test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance with requirements. E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance with requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing: 1. Expansion anchors. 2. Powder- actuated anchors. 3. Mechanical fasteners. 4. Verticals slide clips. H. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence cold- formed metal framing's compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed cold - formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -- Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - -Sheet Steel." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 2 C. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Where fire- resistance -rated assemblies are indicated, provide cold - formed metal framing identical to that tested as part of an assembly for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. his 1. Fire- Resistance Ratings: As indicated by design designations listed in UL "Fire Resistance Directory," or by Warnock Hersey or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I�r 6 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold - formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold- formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold - formed metal framing by one of the following: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. 2. Dale Industries, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc. 5. Unimast, Inc. 6. United Construction Supply. 7. United States Steel. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 (ASTM A 446M), zinc coated according to ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M), and as follows: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWI A, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 3 1. Coating Designation: G 90 (Z 275). 2. Grade: D (33,000 psi) minimum. 3. Thickness: 16 gage, minimum. 2.3 WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs of web depths indicated, on drawings with lipped flanges, and complying with the following: 1. Uncoated -Steel Thickness: as indicated on drawing. 2. Flange Width: 1 9/16" (41 mm), minimum. 3. Web: Punched or unpunched. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track, unpunched, of web depths indicated, with straight flanges, and complying with the following: A. Fabricate steel - framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi for 21/2 to 6" members and 40,000 psi for members larger than 6 ". B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Gusset plates. 5. Deflection track and vertical slide clips. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 4 1. Uncoated -Steel Thickness: Match steel studs. 2. Flange Width: Manufacturers standard deep flange. 2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES hag 6. Stud kickers and girts. 7. End closures. 8. Reinforcement plates. 2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), zinc coated by the hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123. B. Cast -in -Place Anchor Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); carbon -steel hex -head bolts and studs; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened -steel washers. Zinc coated by the hot -dip process according to ASTM A 153. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Powder - Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion- resistant coated, self - drilling, self - threading steel drill screws. F. Head Type: Low - profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20 or DOD -P- 21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage- compensating agents, plasticizing and water - reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and a 30- minute working time. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 5 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold- formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies in jig templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold- formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold -framed metal framing manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold - formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8" in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8" from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold - formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out -of- square tolerance of 1/8 ". SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MAIL COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements, including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cold- formed metal framing. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold- formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold- formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold - formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold -framed metal framing manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads. C. Install framing members in one - piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. D. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized. Ire SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 7 `.. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold- formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. F. Install insulation in built -up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and double studs, inaccessible upon completion of framing work. G. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold - formed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8" in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8" (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 NONLOAD - BEARING EXTERIOR CURTAINWALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm) minimum or as indicated on structural drawings. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install deflection track and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect studs with vertical slide clips to continuous angles or supplementary framing anchored to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in curtainwall studs, spaced in rows not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 8 1. Install additional row of horizontal bridging in curtainwall stud beneath deflection track when curtainwall studs are not fastened to an additional top track. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, steel -sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, solid blocking, firestopping, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtainwall- framing system. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold - formed metal framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer to ensure that cold - formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at the time of application of sheathing or gypsum board. END OF SECTION 05400 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 9 SECTION 05810 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Floor expansion joint cover assemblies. 2. Wall expansion joint cover assemblies. 3. Ceiling and soffit expansion joint cover assemblies. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for cast -in anchorage and frames for expansion joints cover assemblies in concrete floors, parking decks, and walls. 2. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for walls, partitions and ceilings with expansion joints. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Furnished by Mall Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for phases of Work, including preparing substrate, applying materials, and protecting installed units. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of expansion joint cover assemblies to be embedded in or anchored SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05810 - 1 to concrete or to have recesses formed into edges of concrete slab for later placement and grouting -in of frames. C. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Coordinate provision of anchorage devices and fasteners by others where necessary to secure expansion joint cover assemblies to construction. 3.2 INSTALLATION D. Provide inset as required for installation of Sears side expansion joint receiver. Mall Owner will furnish and install expansion joint assembly including Sears side receiver. Sears contractor is to closely coordinate with this Mall Owner to provide blockout on Sears side as required and furnish and install grout fill on Sears side following installation of expansion joint assembly. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exposed surfaces from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 05810 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 r.+ 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05810 - 2 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood nailers and blocking. 2. Gypsum sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05400 "Cold- Formed Metal Farming ". 2. Section 09300 "Ceramic Tile ". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Submit the following according to Sears General and Special Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation, and finishing of treated material: 1. For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 in hat ire ie 2. For water -borne treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site. 3. For fire- retardant treated wood products include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements. 4. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire- retardant treated wood products with requirements indicated. 5. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain each type of fire- retardant- treated wood product from a single source and by a single producer. 1.6 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with DOC PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory- marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 2 2.2 BOARDS C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. A. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber of 19 percent maximum moisture content (S -DRY or KD -19) and of following species and grade: 1. Southern Pine "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules, or any species graded "Construction Boards" per WCLIB or WWPA rules. 2.3 GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND FURRING A. Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: "Standard" grade light- framing -size lumber of any species or board -size lumber as required. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Provide fasteners of size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for mails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or pressure treated, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 3 L L boo bow B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF -N -105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER -272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 2.5 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. Where lumber or plywood is not fire- retardant treated or is indicated as preservative - treated wood, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. B. Pressure -treat above - ground items with water -borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, plywood sheathing, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. C. Pressure -treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water- borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf. D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. E. Manufacturers: 1. Hickson Corp. 2. Hoover Treated Wood Products. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 4 3. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc. 2.6 FIRE- RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. Where fire- retardant- treated wood is indicated, or required by code, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire- retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated; identify "fire-retardant- treated wood" with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide fire- retardant - treated wood for which a current model code evaluation/research report exists that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidences compliance of fire- retardant- treated wood for application indicated. B. Interior Type A: For interior locations use fire- retardant chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation: 1. No reduction takes place in bending strength, stiffness, and fastener holding capacities below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation that are based on tests by a qualified independent testing laboratory of treated wood products identical to those indicated for this Project under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions. 2. No other form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to manufacture and treatment. 3. No corrosion of metal fasteners results from their contact with treated wood. C. Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 1. Use in connection with roofing, flashing, and waterproofing. D. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Interior Type A Fire - Retardant- Treated Wood: a. "Dricon," Hickson Corporation. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 5 b. "Pyro- Guard," Hoover Treated Wood Products. c. "Flameproof LHC -HIT," Osmose Wood Preserving Co, Inc. 2. Exterior Type Fire - Retardant- Treated Wood: a. "Exterior Fire -X," Hoover Treated Wood Products. 2.7 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Sheathing: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems- -Class PB." B. Glass -Mat Gypsum Board: Gypsum board designed as an exterior substrate for a weather barrier, consisting of a noncombustible water - resistant core, essentially gypsum, surfaced with glass mats on face and back, partially or completely embedded in core, and with unsurfaced square edges. Comply with ASTM C 1177. 1. Thickness: 1/2" C. Product: 1. "Dens -Glass Gold FR "; Georgia- Pacific Corp. 2.8 TAPES AND SEALANT A. Sheathing Tape: Tape specifically designed and manufactured to seal joints in gypsum sheathing against water and air infiltration, formulated with an adhesive that permanently bonds to gypsum sheathing substrates, and as indicated below: 1. Linerless, polypropylene sheathing tape, 0.0027 inch (0.07 mm) thick, 21/2 inches (63 mm) wide, composed of oriented polypropylene backing coated with permanent acrylic adhesive formulated to adhere to gypsum sheathing surfaces. 2. Polyethylene tape, 0.025 inch (0.63 mm) thick, 3 inches (76 mm) wide, composed of polyethylene backing coated with synthetic -rubber -based adhesive. 3. Self- adhering, glass -fiber tape, 2 inches (51 mm) wide, 10 -by -10 or 10 -by -20 threads per inch (25.4 mm), of type recommended by tape manufacturer to use with siliconized emulsion sealant in sealing joints and fasteners for gypsum sheathing, and with a history of successful in- service use. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MAID. ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 6 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. No. 8086 Contractor Sheathing Tape; 3M Construction Markets. b. Perma -Tite Tape - -PGM 207A; PermaGlass -Mesh, Inc. c. POLYKEN 612 Seam Seal Tape; Polyken Technologies. d. Quik -Tape; Quik -Tape, Inc. A. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Product complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sealant tape and gypsum sheathing, recommended by manufacturers of both sheathing and tape for use with glass -fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Elmer's Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk; Borden, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill to prevent splitting. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY 07 -164 (TUKWI A, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 7 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers and blocking, where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 WOOD FURRING A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. 3.4 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install framing members of size and spacing indicated. C. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with National Evaluation Report No. NER- 272 for pneumatic or mechanical driven staples, P- Nails, and allied fasteners, "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with N.F.P.A. "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction," and recommended nailing /fastening schedule of the applicable codes. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Install gypsum sheathing board according to manufacturer's instructions and GA -253 "Application of Gypsum Sheathing ". B. Install square end and edged sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to, and centered over, studs. Install solid blocking where end joints do not bear against framing sills or track. Fasten gypsum sheathing board to perimeter framing and to each stud with self - drilling, bugle -head screws, located a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from ends and edges of board units, as follows: 1. Space fasteners to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 8 2. Space fasteners not more than 8 inches (203 mm) apart around perimeter at edge and end supports and 8 inches (203 mm) apart at intermediate supports. 3.6 TAPE AND SEALANT APPLICATION A. Sheathing Tape: Apply sheathing tape to joints in sheathing; overlap tape by not less than the tape width at joint intersections. 1. For polyethylene tape, apply primer, specified by tape manufacturer, to sheathing surfaces. In addition, apply polyethylene tape, 2 inches (50 rum) square, to completely cover each exposed fastener. 2. For glass -fiber tape, apply approximately a 3/8 -inch (9.5 mm) bead of siliconized emulsion sealant to tapes along joints and embed sealant into tapes along their entire surface with a trowel. In addition, apply sealant with a trowel to each exposed fastener so that fasteners are completely covered. END OF SECTION 06100 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 9 i L Nab vio rr rs b ler boo ►r L bre SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1_2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building insulation in batt form. L3 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2- PRODUCTS """ 2A MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. B. Single- Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, sunlight, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation. A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products of one of the following: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BUILDING INSULATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 �"" 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07210 - 1 1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. c. Johns - Manville. d. Owens /Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Faced Glass Fiber Batt or Roll Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with foil - scrim -kraft vapor - retarder facing on one side with maximum flame spread of 25 or less). B. Adhesively Attached Pin Anchors: Perforated plate, 2 inches square, welded to projecting pin, with self - locking washer, complying with the following requirements: 1. Plate: Zinc- plated steel, 0.106 inch thick. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BUILDING INSULATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWII.A, WASHINGTON) 07210 - 2 1. Combustion Characteristics: Unfaced blanket/batt passes ASTM E 136 test. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed fro values of 25 and 50, respectively. 3. Thermal Resistance: R-11 for interior partitions and walls, R -19 for exterior walls and above ceilings. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation or mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or corroding either insulation, anchors, or substrates. is 2. Pin: Copper- coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 inches in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated and, with washer in place, to hold insulation tightly to substrate behind insulation. 3. Self- Locking Washer: Mild steel, 0.016 inch thick, size as required to hold insulation securely. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION a. Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after installation, protect ends with capped self - locking washers. A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders. 33 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. D. On walls use faced insulation, or unfaced insulation with sheet vapor barrier. Where no interior drywall surface is in placed. Provide wire screen retainer for insulation. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BUILDING INSULATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07210- 3 3A INSTALLATION OF BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. Employ fastening system to ensure that insulation remains in- place fully extending to perimeter of area to be covered. B. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. 3.5 PROTECTION 1. Friction fit roll and batt insulation between studs. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BUILDING INSULATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07210 - 4 kof SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Metal counter flashing and base flashing. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS A. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper T -5 or T -6, 0.040 -inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder: For use with stainless steel, provide 60 - 40 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32), with acid - chloride type flux, except use rosin flux over tinned surfaces. B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non - corrosive metal as w`° recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, non - drying, nonmigrating sealant. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWII.A, WASHINGTON) 07600 - 1 E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2 -part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior /interior nonmoving joints including riveted joints. G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather - resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. H. Paper Slip Sheet: 5 -1b. Rosin -sized building paper. I. Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6 -mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154. J. Reglets: Metal units of type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing indicated, noncorrosive. K. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance. L. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed -cell polyethylene or other soft closed -cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. M. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 2.3 FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop- fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather- resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil- canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWI A, WASHINGTON) 07600 - 2 Ir. B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. For stainless steel tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water /weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer /fabricator. F. Downspouts: Formed 0.032" thick aluminum. 2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. High Performance Coating: Fluoropolymer Two -Coat System: Primer coat and color coat utilizing not less than 70 percent Elf Atochem "Kynar 500" polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, based coating; comply with AAMA 605.2. 1. Color: Match exterior building wall color as approved by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3_1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07600 - 3 B. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. D. Install reglets to receive counterflashing in manner and by methods indicated. Where shown Where shown in concrete, furnish reglets to trades of concrete work for installation as work of Division 3 sections. Where shown in masonry, furnish reglets to trades of masonry work, for installation as work of Division 4 sections. E. Install counterflashing in reglets, either by snap -in seal arrangement or by welding in place for anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or elastomeric sealant, as indicated and depending on degree of sealant exposure. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07600 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07600 - 4 v in SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below: a. Joints between different materials. b. Perimeter joints of door frames, and storefront. c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and guides of interior doors. c. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08800 "Glass and Glazing" for sealants used in glazing. 2. Section 09300 "Tile" for sealing tile joints. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 1 B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. 1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. 2. Manufacturer's inspection and maintenance procedures. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealant samples in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6 -inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. E. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. F. Qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article. G. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. H. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. I. Preconstruction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrate acceptable adhesion to joint substrates. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 Yor I1Yr L5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer approved in writing by the sealant manufacturer. B. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory- submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying progress of the Work. C. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. D. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24 -month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect. 1. Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement (per ASTM C 719), low - temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering. 2. Include test results performed on joint sealants after they have cured for 1 year. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 3 L99 WARRANTY 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 °F (4.4 °C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less or more than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. L8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than seven days after completion of exterior doors, windows and storefront. A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the sealant manufacturer and installer, agreeing to repair or replace sealants that fail in material or workmanship within ten years after the date of Substantial Completion. B. The warranty shall not deprive the Owners of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Unlimited custom colors chosen by Architect to match color of adjacent surfaces, for exterior silicone and polyurethane. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 L A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for Uses indicated. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide on the following: 1. Single -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealants: a. Mameco "Vulkem 921" b. Pecora Corp. "Dynatrol I" c. Peterson "Iso -Flex 881" d. PRC "Permapol RC -1" e. Sika Corp. "Sikaflex 1 a" f. Tremco "Dymonic" 2. Single -Part Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealants: a. Dow Corning "790" b. GE "Silpruf c. Rhone - Poulenc, Inc. "Rhodorsil 5C" d. Sonnebom "Sonolastic Omniseal e. Tremco "Spectrum 1" 2.3 SOLVENT - RELEASE - CURING JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent - release - curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S -00230 or both, SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 5 with capability when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively: 1. 7% percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 15 percent. B. Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent - release- curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids to be nonstaining, paintable, and have a tack -free time of 24 hours or less. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acrylic Sealant: a. "60 +Unicrylic," Pecora Corp. b. "PTI 738," Protective Treatments, Inc. c. "PTI 767," Protective Treatments, Inc. d. "Mono," Tremco, Inc. 2. Butyl Sealant: a. "BC- 158," Pecora Corp. b. "PTI 757," Protective Treatments, Inc. c. "Sonnebom Multi- Purpose Sealant," Sonnebom Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. d. "Tremco Butyl Sealant," Tremco, Inc. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 6 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 NS B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below '' and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Open -cell polyurethane foam. 2. Closed -cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state. 3. Proprietary, reticulated, closed -cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than 0.02 gms /cc per ASTM C 1083. 4. Any material indicated above approved for use with sealant by sealant manufacturer. C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining w,d resilient at temperatures down to -26 °F (- 32 °C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self - adhesive tape where applicable. 0 Mi 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 7 23 LOCATIONS OF USE A. Single -Part Non -sag Urethane Sealant: Interior control and expansion joints and interior side of perimeter joints around doors and windows in exterior wall. B. Single -Part Neutral- Curing Silicone Sealant: Exterior joints unless otherwise noted. C. Acrylic or Butyl Sealant: Interior joints around perimeter of door frames, under exterior door thresholds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 8 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 r harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant- substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 9 D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 3. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 15 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07901 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 10 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 r SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1_2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall and ceiling access panels. 2. Types: a. Painted Steel, trimless at gypsum wallboard. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for installation in gypsum board walls and ceilings. 2. Section 09900 "Painting" for field applied finish. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of access panel, including details of construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire- protection ratings. C. Shop drawings showing locations, quantities, sizes, fabrication and installation of access panels and frames, including details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, locking provisions, anchorage, and accessory items. L4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single- Source Responsibility: Obtain access panels for entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACCESS DOORS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08310 -1 B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. Show on shop drawings. 1_5 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access panels needed to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on shop drawings specified under "Submittals" Article. Show on shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2_1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cesco Products 2. J.L. Industries 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 5. Milcor, Inc. 2_2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M commercial- quality, cold- rolled steel sheet with baked -on, rust- inhibitive primer. 2.3 ACCESS DOORS A. Trimless, Flush Access Doors for Gypsum Board: Units consisting of frame, concealed edge trim, door, hardware, and complying with the following requirements: 1. Frame: 0.0598 -inch- (1.52 -mm -) thick steel sheet. 2. Door: 0.0747 -inch- (1.90 -mm -) thick steel sheet. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACCESS DOORS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08310 - 2 Ira too 3. Concealed, Gypsum Board Edge. Trim: 0.0299 -inch (0.76 -mm) zinc - coated or galvanized -steel sheet with face flange formed to receive joint compound. 4. Hinge: Continuous type. 5. Latches: Bolt or cam type, operated by flush key device. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. B. Steel and Stainless Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind and polish welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of substrate indicated. 1. For gypsum board assemblies furnish frames with concealed edge trim for gypsum board or gypsum base. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access panels that must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 3_2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access panels. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces. C. Coordinate with appropriate trades for quantities, sizes and locations. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACCESS DOORS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08310 - 3 B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08310 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACCESS DOORS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08310 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 • SECTION 08340 - OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1_2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Overhead coiling grilles, including curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanisms, hardware, operators, and installation accessories. r B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08310 "Access Doors ". 2. Section 8710 "Door Hardware ". 3. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for openings. 4. Electrical connections are specified in Division 16. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data, roughing -in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead coiling grille. Include operating instructions and maintenance data. C. Shop drawings for special components and installations that are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. D. Samples of grille curtain with specified finish. 1.4 OUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish overhead coiling grille units by one manufacturer for entire Project. A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL OVERHEAD COILING GRILLS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08340 - 1 B. Anchorages: Furnish anchoring devices that must be built into gypsum board partitions for installation of overhead coiling grille units. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of AlumaTek, contact Rachel Maxwell, at 1- 800 - 647 -7049. 1. Unless otherwise noted, provide "Model AT -9/LX" (polycarbonate panels). 2. Where required by code, provide "Model AT -9/PF" (perforated aluminum panel(s)). 2.2 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. Counterbalance grille by means of steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to the curtain. Use grease- sealed ball bearings or self - lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance: Hot - formed, structural - quality carbon steel, welded or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support the rolled -up curtain without distortion and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot of span under full load. 1. Furnish spring balance of one or more oil- tempered, heat - treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast -steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. 2. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of case - hardened steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. C. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design, cold - rolled steel plate. 2.3 ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATORS A. Furnish electric operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by grille manufacturer; complete with electric motor and factory- pre -wired motor controls, gear- reduction unit, solenoid- operated brake, remote - control stations, and control devices. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL OVERHEAD COILING GRILLS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08340 - 2 B. Provide hand - operated disconnect or a mechanism for automatically engaging a sprocket- and -chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation. b`" Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include an interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged or door is deadlocked. C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing limit- switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. lbw D. Operator Type: Furnish wall or bracket - mounted operator units consisting of electric motor, worm -gear drive from motor to reduction gear box, chain or worm -gear drive from reduction box to a gear wheel mounted on counterbalance shaft, and disconnect- release for manual operation. Provide motor and drive assembly of horsepower and design as determined by manufacturer for size of unit required. E. Electric Motors: Provide high- starting torque, reversible, constant -duty, Class A, insulated electric motors with overload protection, sized to move grille in either direction, from any position, at not less than .25 foot nor more than 1 foot per second. 6 is 1. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of motors with building electrical system. 2. Provide open - drip -proof type motor, and controller with NEMA Type 1 enclosure. F. Remote Control Station: Provide momentary- contact, key switch on interior side of wall, operating mechanism so grille can be stopped at any point in its travel and to remain in position until movement is reactivated by turning key. 1. Provide interior units, full - guarded type, recessed - mounted, heavy -duty, with general - purpose NEMA Type 1 enclosure. G. Automatic Reverse Control: Provide each grille with bottom rail sensor and safety device which will stop grille from fully closing and immediately stop downward travel and reverse direction to fully opened position if an obstruction is in the way. 1. Connect to control circuit. No exposed wires are permitted. H. Provide automatic electric lockout that prevents motor from operating when curtain is in an opened or closed position and locks are engaged. No exposed wires permitted. ►� PART 3 - EXECUTION SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL OVERHEAD COILING GRILLS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 Irr 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08340 - 3 3A INSTALLATION A. Install grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified here. B. After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust grilles to operate easily, free from warp, twist, distortion, or binding. END OF SECTION 08340 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL OVERHEAD COILING GRILLS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08340 - 4 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1_2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior entrance doors. 2. Frames for entrances. 3. Storefront -type framing system at entrances and clerestory. 4. Power assist door openers with guards. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08800 "Glass and Glazing," glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront, including entrances specified to be factory glazed. 2. Section 08710 "Finish Hardware," lock cylinders. 3. Division 16: Electrical service and final connections for power door operators. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated. B. Thermal Movement: Design aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems to provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall function normally over the specified temperature range. 1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range of 180 °F (100 °C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, stress on glass, or other detrimental effects. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 1 C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems that comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies capable of withstanding wind pressures of 40 psf inward and 40 psf outward acting normal to the plane of the wall. D. Structural Performance: Conduct tests for structural performance in accordance with ASTM E 330. At the conclusion of the tests there shall be no glass breakage or permanent damage to fasteners, anchors, hardware or actuating mechanism. Framing members shall have no permanent deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear span. 1. Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure required to measure deflection of framing members normal to the plane of the wall shall be equivalent to the wind load specified above. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear span, when subjected to uniform load deflection test. 2. Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressures required to measure deflection parallel to the plane of the wall shall be equal to 1.5 times the wind pressures specified above. Deflection of any member carrying its full dead load shall not exceed an amount that will reduce glass bite below 75 percent of the design dimension and shall not reduce the edge clearance between the member and the fixed panel, glass or other fixed member above to less than 1/8 ". The clearance between the member and an operable door or window shall be at least 1/16 inch. E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront framing system with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf. F. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled water penetration (excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft. G. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal- break" construction, provide units tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503 showing condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 2 w it m H. Thermal Transmittance: Provide framing systems that have an overall U -value of not more than 0.65 BTU /(hr. x sq. ft. x °F) at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. L4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: 1. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. 2. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. 3. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. C. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: 1. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. 2. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale. 3. Detail sections of typical composite members. 4. Anchors and reinforcement. 5. Hardware mounting heights. 6. Provisions for expansion and contraction. 7. Glazing details. D. Coordinate hardware and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each door opening. E. Submit two samples of aluminum finish specified on 12" long sections extrusions of material to be used on project. Where color or texture variations are anticipated, provide additional sets of samples indicating extreme limits of variations. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 • 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 3 1. Construction Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples, that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. F. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing that aluminum entrance and storefront systems have been tested in accordance with specified test procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated. G. Certification of the installer, by the aluminum entrance and storefront manufacturer. L5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems produced by a nationally recognized firm experienced in manufacturing standard systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in- service performance. 1. Extrusions and components assembled by local fabricators not permitted. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems fabricated by a firm approved in writhing by the manufacturer. The fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce components required without causing delay in progress of the Work. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer approved in writing by the manufacturer. D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain entrance and storefront systems from one source and from a single manufacturer. E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements of aluminum entrance and storefront work required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Aluminum entrance and storefront by other referenced manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL . ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 4 las iro Its r B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air. 1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage. 1_7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication iee schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. 1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. L8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, and installer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration. 2. Faulty operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company Inc. "Tri-Fab 451 T" shear block assembly for exterior entrance storefront and clerestory, or equal system manufactured by one of the following: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 5 1. Amarlite Architectural Products. 2. Tubelite Division of Indal, Inc. 3. YKK AP America, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire. B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip. C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be non - corrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw - anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard non - corrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat -head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened. E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179 -inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026 -inch thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high - strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 6 5. Push Bars: Forms and Surfaces "Series DT -1211 x 33," 11/4" diameter, US32 r... polished stainless steel with concealed mounting. 6. Pull Handles on exterior doors main entrance doors: Forms and surfaces "Series �• DT -1211 x 12," 11/4" diameter, US32 polished stainless steel with concealed mounting. Ili H. Compression Weather stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible weather stripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287. I. Sliding Weather stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2. 2.3 HARDWARE A. Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. B. Provide heavy -duty hardware units as indicated, schedule, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door. Finish schedule is for exterior doors. 1. Offset Pivot Sets: Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Provide exposed parts of cast aluminum alloy. Provide top, bottom and intermediate pivot for each door leaf. 2. Surface - Mounted Overhead Closer: LCN 4040 - Cush x 3049 CNS Arm 85° series type with cover, for parallel - arm -type mounting installation. Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for closer size, depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. 3. Mortise type cylinders are supplied under another Division 8 Section for keying into the building system. 4. Deadlocks: Mortised maximum security three -point deadlock, with minimum f- inch long pivoted bolt and stainless steel strike box; comply with ANSI A156.5, Grade 1. On one leaf of each bank of doors, deadlock shall be furnished with an exit indicator similar to Adams Rite's Option 4089. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 7 7. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold of size and design indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots. 8. Door Holder: Glynn Johnson. 100 -H. 2.4 POWER ASSIST DOOR OPENERS: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dor- O- Matic, "SR Swing." Contact Sears Account Representative at (708) 867- 7400 or (800) 543 -4635. 2. Gyro Tech, Inc., Division of Lanson Ind., Contact Sears Account Representative at (414) 679 -0045, (414) 679 -2505 - FAX. B. One door at each new exterior entrance to the Main Store shall be equipped with a power assist door opener. A button controlling the exterior door, shall be positioned on the outside of the building and inside the entry area. C. Hard wire interior controls and radio transmit exterior controls. D. Provide: Low energy units to comply with ANSI A117 and A156 -19, adjustable time delay, safety stop and close when meeting an obstruction. Wall- mounted push button actuation, with universal handicapped symbol. Interior push button to be by Curran Engineering CE -635 or equal. Exterior push button to be satin stainless steel post mounted system by Curran Engineering CE- 910/911 -615 or equal. See drawings for locations. E. Closer finish to match storefront and entrances frames. 2.5 COMPONENTS A. Storefront Framing System for: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include sub - frames and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop - fabricate and pre - assemble frame components where possible. Provide window frame sections without exposed seams. 1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 8 6 L is B. Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads. C. Stile- and -Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j- bolts. 1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for non - removal. 2. Design: Provide 1 inch -thick doors of design indicated. a. Medium Stile that complies with code requirements (minimum — 3 '/z" nominal width and 10" bottom rail). D. Aluminum Closure: Provide 0.090" thick aluminum sheet with spray applied thermal insulation on concealed side. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. 1. Thermal -Break Construction: Fabricate storefront framing system with an integrally concealed, low- conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members to eliminate direct metal -to -metal contact. Use manufacturer's standard construction that has been in use for similar projects. B. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes. 2. Do not drill and tap for surface- mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. 3. Pre -glaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 9 C. Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish. 1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface. D. Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity. E. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a non - absorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. F. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members. 1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. G. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. H. For exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2_7 FINISHES 1. Provide EPDM or vinyl -blade gasket weather stripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 2. At interior doors and other locations without weather stripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 10 B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. High Performance Organic coating: AA- C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned r.+ with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid chromate- fluoride - phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below). is Prepare, pre - treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions. v 1. Fluoropolymer 3 -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 3 -coat thermo- cured system, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color coat, and clear fluorocarbon topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent Elf Atochem "Kynar 500" polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; comply with AAMA 605.2. 2. Color and Gloss: Kyner Bone White. 3. Use at storefronts and door frames. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Ire A. Examine substrates and supports, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installation. B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. IY.I C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the following tolerances: w.. 1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or VI inch in any total length. 2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 11 D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication. 2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant coating. E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface - mounted hardware items. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. F. Set sill members in bed of sealant. Set other members with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weather -tight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. G. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, not pre - glazed by manufacturer. H. Coordinate and install power assist door button post on bridge construction. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weather -tight closure. 3A CLEANING 4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out -of -plane offset of framing at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch. A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 12 L A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 08410 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS . NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 13 SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL L1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. L2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. Items: 1. Lock cylinders and keys. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08310 for mall rolling grill. 2. Section 08410 "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts" for aluminum entrance door hardware, except cylinders. D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include: 1. Cylinders for locks on entrance doors. 2. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by the Owner. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate hardware with other work in respect to both fabrication and installation. Furnish other trades with templates and deliver hardware to proper locations. B. Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents in effect at time of door hardware selection, furnish types, finishes, and quantities of door hardware, including fasteners, and Owner's maintenance tools required to comply with specified requirements and as needed to install and maintain hardware. Furnish or replace any items of door hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items at no cost to Sears. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 6 C. Provide secured lock -up for hardware delivered to the site. Inventory hardware jointly with representative of hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials. 1_4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. In addition to the copies provided to the Architect, provide (1) copy to the Owner — Construction Planning Manager. B. Product data including manufacturers technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information. bir 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential product data in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit final schedule after samples, product data, coordination with shop drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and accepted. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 2 3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch, lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single supplier. B. Supplier: Approved hardware suppliers are as follows: 1. Classic Hardware Company Contact: Joseph Giovenco 388 Gunderson Drive Carol Stream, IL 60188 Phone: 630 -597 -0050 Ext. 102 Fax: 630 -597 -0051 or as accepted by Owner's Representative. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). E. Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Sears' continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated. 2.2 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Integrate with existing grandmaster /masterkey system for Project. 1. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, or grandmaster). 2. Comply with Sears instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. a. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE." B. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. C. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock. 1. Furnish one extra blank for each lock. 2. Deliver keys to key control system manufacturer. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 4 3. Deliver keys to Sears — Field Construction Project Manager. D. Equip locks with manufacturer's removable core cylinder. E. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 23 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push -pull units if no latch or lock sets). B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. Provide-protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix " -NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer." E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and w. recommendations. B. Removable construction core cylinders shall be used on all locks. No keys are to be r.., delivered to the General Contractor with the locks. All permanent keys for all finished hardware are to be sent to Sears Field Construction Project Manager. Transmittal of said keys for proper installation will then be handled by Sears. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING rs SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 5 A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. PART 4 - HARDWARE SCHEDULE Hardware suppliers shall provide quantities and door hardware equipment according to the construction bid documents and the following schedule: A. Hardware Set No. 1: (MALL Entrance # 103) All other Hardware by door Manufacturer. (a) Cylinder Schlage 20 -061 -626 (b) Control Panel Wall Mounted Cylinder Schlage 20- 061 -626 B. Hardware Set No. 2 -: (Exterior Vestibule Doors # 101 & 102) All other Hardware by door Manufacturer. (a) Cylinder (Mortise) Schlage 20 062 - 626 (b) Thumbturn Cylinder Schlage IL631 -626 (c) Decals Vinyl Decal to read "THIS DOOR MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS" END OF SECTION 08710 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 6 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following components and assemblies, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Entrances and other doors. 2. Storefront construction. B. Related Sections: Refer to the following sections of specifications for glass products covered in other assemblies and not specified in this section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. C. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standard. D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 • moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions. L4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat - treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in doors, and exterior walls is 1/4 inch. 2. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat - treated glass, are selected so the worst -case probability of failure does not exceed the following: a. 8 lites per 1 000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300. For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass. b. 1 lite per 1000 for lites set over 15 degrees off vertical and under action of wind or snow. C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass- framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 °F (67 °C), ambient; 180 °F (100 °C), material surfaces. 2. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. C. Samples for verification purposes of 12- inch - square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12- inch -long samples of each color (except black) required for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. G. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. H. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA TIR -A7 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines" and "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing." 3. LSGA Publications: "LSGA Design Guide." 4. SIGMA Publications: TM -3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" and TB -3001 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI). 3. National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL). D. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in- service performance. E. Single - Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: 1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Heat - treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. 3. Laminated glass of each (ASTM C 1172) kind indicated. 4. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. F. Single- Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 G. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to sealant manufacturers, samples of each glass, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass - framing member that will contact or affect glazing sealants for compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated below: 1. Use test methods standard with sealant manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific preparation techniques are required for rapid, optimum glazing sealants adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates. a. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions during installation. 2. Submit not less than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass- framing members and each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic, laminated, insulating units) for adhesion testing, as well as one sample of each glazing accessory (gaskets, setting blocks and spacers) for compatibility testing. 3. Schedule sufficient time to test and analyze results to prevent delay in the Work. 4. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and get sealant manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, including using special primers. 5. Testing is not required when glazing sealant manufacturer can submit required preparation data that is acceptable to Architect and is based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to and compatibility with submitted glazing materials. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1_8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 5 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 °F (4.4 °C). 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Warranty on Laminated Glass: Submit written warranty signed by insulating glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those laminated glass units that deteriorate as defined in the "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass by one of the following: 1. Ford Glass. 2. PPG. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 6 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 3. Pilkington. 4. Guardian Industries Corp. 5. Spectrum Glass Products. 6. Viracon, Inc. 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below, and Quality q3 (glazing select). 1. Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Class 2 (Low E, heat - absorbing, and light- reducing) 23 HEAT - TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller - hearth) process. B. Uncoated, Clear, Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below. 1. Kind HS (heat strengthened) where indicated. 1. Kind HS (heat strengthened) where indicated. 2. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. 2.4 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 7 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 2. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. C. Coated, Clear, Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other coated glass), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), with coating type and performance characteristics complying with requirements specified under coated glass products; kind as indicated below: A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated. 1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units. 2.5 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section, including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet, provide products, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, with the capability to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. C. Manufacturers: 1. Tremco Inc. 2. Pecora Corp. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 8 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 3. General Electric. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Back - Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.1. 2. AAMA 806.1. 3. AAMA 807.1. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed -cell, polyvinyl chloride foam tape, factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces, packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive, and complying with AAMA 800 for product 810.5. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Back - Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod: a. PTI 303 Glazing Tape (shimless), Protective Treatments, Inc. b. S -M 5700 Poly -Glaze Tape Sealant, Schnee - Morehead, Inc. c. Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco Inc. d. Extru -Seal, Pecora Corp. e. PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc. f. Dyna -Seal, Pecora Corp. g. PT1626 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc. h. S -M 5710 H.P Poly -Glaze Tape Sealant, Schnee - Morehead, Inc. i. SST -800 Tape, Tremco, Inc. 2. .Back- Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 9 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 a. P11 303 Glazing Tape (with shim), Protective Treatments, Inc. b. Pre - shimmed Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco, Inc. c. P11 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc. 3. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: a. Norseal V -980 Closed -Cell Glazing Tape, Norton Company. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side - walking). F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding, nonoutgassing, strips of closed -cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance. 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 10 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt- glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. 2.9 GLASS SCHEDULE 1. Type "A ": 1" insulating glass; 'A" clear laminated outerpane, low E coating on surface 2; ' /2" air space; 1/4" laminated inner pane. (Heat strengthen as required.) 2. Type `B" is the same except outer pane is "satin opaque" instead of "clear." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at comers. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass- framing members. B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings from substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 11 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass comers. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. 2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by glass manufacturer and fabricator, and preconstruction sealant- ,; substrate testing. E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: 1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 12 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) GLAZING 08800 - 13 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. Orr Yrr B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build -up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING 08800 - 14 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nonload- bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board, fire rated and non -fire rated. 3. Glass -mat, water - resistant gypsum backing board installed with gypsum board assemblies. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and glass -mat faced gypsum sheathing. 2. Section 09511 "Acoustic Panel Ceiling" for proprietary suspension systems. 3. Section 09900 "Painting" for finishing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. L4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire- resistance ratings indicated. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 1 ioo 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single- Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Single- Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. C. Single- Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. D. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Where fire- resistance -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire - Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA -600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 2 B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: For non - adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 °F (4 °C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 °F (10 °C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 °F (35 °C) when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2A MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Dale Industries, Inc. b. Dietrich Industries, Inc. c. Marino/Ware (formerly Marino Industries Corp.). d. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. e. Unimast, Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Georgia - Pacific Corp. b. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 3 c. United States Gypsum Co. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated: 1. Firestop Type C; Georgia - Pacific Corp. 2. Fire - Shield G; National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. 3. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core; United States Gypsum Co. 4. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core; United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Chemical anchor. l., 2. Expansion anchor. C. Powder - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. E. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch (4.1 -mm) diameter. F. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust- inhibitive paint. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 4 G. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust- inhibitive paint. H. Channels: Cold- rolled steel, 0.0598 -inch (1.5 -mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 -inch (11.1 -mm -) wide flanges, and as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: 1'/z" (38.1 mm) deep, 475 lb/1000 feet (70 kg/100 m), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Furring Channels: 1/4" (19.1 mm) deep, 300 lb/1000 feet (45 kg/100 m), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Finish: Rust - inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated. I. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3 /16 -inch (5 -mm -) wide minimum lip (retum), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: As indicated. 3. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating. J. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 7/8" (22.2 mm), and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3 /16 -inch (5 -mm -) wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 5 1. Thickness: 20 gage minimum, unless otherwise noted. 2. Depth: As indicated. C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's top runner complying with the requirements of ASTM C 645. 1. Top runner with 21/2-inch (63.5 -mm -) deep flanges that either have V- shaped offsets that compress when pressure is applied from construction above or have slots 1 inch (25.4 mm) o.c. that allow fasteners attached to studs through the slots to accommodate structural movement by slipping. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: i) Superior Flex Track System (SFT); Delta Star, Inc. ii) SLP -TRK; Metal -Lite, Inc. D. Deflection and Firestop Track: Top runner designed to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure above while maintaining continuity of the assembly. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 645 except configuration, of thickness indicated for studs and width to accommodate depth of studs indicated with flanges offset at midpoint to accommodate gypsum board thickness. 1. Offset Configuration: Reveal design with offset recessing in from depth of stud. 2. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated in the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Fire Trak" manufactured by Fire Trak Corp. E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 1' /2" (38.1 mm) F. Steel Channel Bridging: Cold- rolled steel, 0.0598 -inch (1.5 -mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 -inch (11.1 -mm -) wide flanges, 11/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep, 475 lb /1000 feet (45 kg/100 m), unless otherwise indicated. G. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M), length and SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 6 width as indicated, and with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm) unless otherwise indicated. H. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end -to -end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm). B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Type X where required for fire - resistance -rated assemblies. 3. Type: Proprietary type as required for specific fire- resistance -rated assemblies. 4. Type: Sag - resistant type for ceiling surfaces. 5. Edges: Tapered. 6. Thickness: ' /z" unless otherwise required by code and/or the drawings. a. Two layers of 1/4" -thick at curved surfaces. C. Glass -Mat, Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1178, of type and thickness indicated below: 1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 5/8" (15.9 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. L i L L ►r 2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8" (15.9 mm) thick, where required for fire - resistance -rated assemblies. 3. Products: "Dens- Shield Tile Backer" and "Dens- Shield FR Tile Backer," manufactured by Georgia - Pacific Corp. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 r� 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 7 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Comerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot -dip process or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Comerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC -bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC -beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated. c. L -bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L -bead where indicated. d. U -bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U -bead where indicated. e. One -piece control joint formed with V- shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use pressure- sensitive or staple- attached, open- weave, glass -fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. C. Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. a. All- purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 8 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to steel framing. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: 1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick. 2. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board. D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3_1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast -in- anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 12 PREPARATION A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings. 13 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 9 L L L Irr and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with United States Gypsum Co.'s "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on `' Drawings. 1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. iro a. Provide slip- or cushioned -type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor. b. Install deflection track top runner to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. c. Install deflection and firestop track top runner at fire- resistance -rated assemblies where indicated. i) Attach jamb studs at openings to tracks using manufacturer's standard stud clip. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated. 14 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 10 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire - tying, either directly to structures or to devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in- place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard. 1. Wire Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross - furring or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8" inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. E. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross - furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3.5 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 11 A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2" (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For STC -rated and fire - resistance -rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor /roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor /roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated. 1. Space studs 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216. B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 12 more than 1 / 16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Install "J" molding at exposed edges of gypsum board, where abutting other materials. Spackle to provide smooth, continuous surface finish _ E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back - blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. I. Where indicated on drawings and required for fire or sound ratings, cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces, except in chases that are braced internally. 1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 2. Where partitions intersect steel deck, steel joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor /roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by pans, joists, and other structural . members; allow ' / <- to 3/8 -inch wide joints to install s ealant. J. Isolate perimeter of nonload- bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide '/4 to '/z -inch (6.4 to 12.7 -mm -) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o. c. for vertical applications. L. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c. 3.7 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 13 1. A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application and at right angles to framing. 2. On partitions /walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. B. Wall Tile Substrates: For substrates indicated to receive thin -set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, provide the following: 1. Install glass -mat, water - resistant gypsum backing board panels to comply with manufacturer's installation instructions at locations indicated to receive wall tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4 -mm) open space where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 2. Install gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface except at locations indicated to receive water - resistant panels. C. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws. 3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Install cornerbead at external corners. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. 1. Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install L -bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed and when partitions abut to ceiling. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 14 3. Install U -bead where indicated. 4. Install aluminum trim and other accessories where indicated. D. Install control joints as recommended by manufacturer and at locations indicated. 19 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not requiring tape. D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer. E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA -214. 1. Level 3 for joints in stock areas. 2. Level 2 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies and sound - rated assemblies. 3. Level 3 where panels form substrates for tile. 4. Level 4 for other gypsum board surfaces. F. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready - mixed, drying -type, all- purpose or taping compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready- mixed, drying -type, all- purpose or topping compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready - mixed, drying -type, all - purpose or topping compound. G. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 -15 heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. H. Where Level 2 and Level 3 gypsum board fmish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first coat of joint compound. I. Tape and fmish glass -mat, water - resistant gypsum backing board to comply with board manufacturer's directions. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09255 • SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 16 SECTION 09300 - CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Unglazed wall tile. 2. Stone floor tile. 3. Stone wall tile. 4. Divider /edge strips. 5. Reducer /transition strips. 6. Premolded expansion/control joint. 7. Crack isolation membrane. B. Scope of Work: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CERAMIC TILE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09300 -1 Iwo 1. The Owner will furnish stone floor tile. Contractor shall furnish setting materials, grout, accessories, tools and labor for installation of tile. 2. Contractor shall purchase stone wall tiles for mall entrance from Mall Owner to match lot utilized by Mall Owner at remainder of Mall entrance. 200 sf has been set aside for this purpose. �- 3. Contractor shall provide all the floor prep required to complete the work in a first class condition. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 09255 "Gypsum Drywall" for tile backer board installed as part of gypsum wallboard systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS L A. Single- Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture r., component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each product furnished by Contractor. C. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and fmished tile surfaces. 1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring. Record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with Architect. D. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on substrate of size and construction indicated for products that involve color and texture variations, provide in sets showing full range of variations expected. 1. Each type and composition of tile, and for each item furnished by the Contractor, at least 18 inches square for tile unit 6 inches or less in size and 24 inches x 36 inches for larger tile, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. 2. Full -size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. 3. Metal edge strips in 6 -inch lengths. 4. Premolded expansion/control joint in 6" lengths. E. Master grade certificates for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE C. Field- Constructed Mock -Up: Before installing tile, erect mock -ups for each form of construction and fmish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock -ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for fmal unit of Work. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) CERAMIC TILE 09300 - 2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 1. Locate mock -ups on site in location and size inZit or, if not indicated, directed by Architect to show full scope of all typical patterns and conditions in both horizontal and vertical planes. Unless otherwise noted, minimum size of each mock -up shall be 40 s.f. 2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Rework mock -ups as directed by the Architect to achieve desired results. 3. Obtain Owner§ Representative acceptance of mock -ups before start of final unit of Work. 4. Retain and maintain mock -ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed unit of Work. Accepted mock -ups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of Work. D. Post Installation Review: Contractor is alerted that the Architect may chain drag the completed floor tile installation to sound for incomplete bonding. Tiles identified as "hollow" shall be removed and properly replaced by the Contractor. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, receive and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. 1_6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Maintain temperatures at 50 °F (10 °C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. L77 EXTRA MATERIALS SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CERAMIC TILE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09300 - 3 A. For materials by Contractor, deliver extra materials to Sears afdesignated location. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full -size units equal to 5 percent or 20 s.f., whichever is greater, of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. B. For materials furnished by Sears, return extra materials at designated location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS. GENERAL A. Comply with ANSI A137.1 American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for Standard Grade" tile. B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: 1. Provide selections indicated. 2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and fmish of adjoining flat tile, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mounting: Where factory- mounted tile is required, provide back or edge - mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated. 2.2 CERAMIC TILE MATERIALS A. Stone Floor Tile (Furnished by Sears): B. Stone Wall Tile available for purchase from Mall Owner (Contact is Nicholas Lee, Westfield LLC, (206) 802 - 6010). C. Grout 1. Floor: Non - staining grout applied with grout release: a. Product: Mapei Ultra/Color polymer modified sanded grout or equal. b. Match existing color and joint width. 2. Mall Wall: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CERAMIC TILE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09300 - 4 23 TILE CLEANER a. Match products used by Mall. 2.3 THIN -SET LATEX - PORTLAND CEMENT SYSTEM: WALLS AND FLOORS A. Latex - portland cement mortar: ANSI A118.4. B. Latex - portland cement grout: ANSI A118.6. C. Latex additive Bostik 425" acrylic additive. 2A MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Pre - molded Expansion/Control Joint: Ceramic Tool Corp., CTC Model," color to match grout. B. Metal Edge Strips: Match existing, similar to Ceramic Tool Corp. 11 clear anodized aluminum metal edge with integral provisions for anchorage to mortar bed substrate. C. Reducer Strips: Ceramic Tool Corp. Tranx" strip, 3/8" high. 2.5 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. 2.6 FIELD - APPLIED TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COATING A. Where needed to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. B. Temporary Protective Coating: Sure Klean Protec Tile" by ProSoCo applied as protective coating prior to grout application and removed with excess grout prior to application of sealer. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) CERAMIC TILE 09300 - 5 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 A. ProSoCo, Inc., Vanatrol." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Examine substrates in areas where tile will be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Expansion joints in tile shall follow manufactures recommendations. B. Locate all cracks and joints in slab and record on shop drawing submittal. Prepare cracks, cold joints and slab as directed by crack isolation membrane manufacturer and install crack isolation membrane consistent with manufacturer's instructions. Membrane width shall provide a minimum 12" (Nobel Seal CIS) or 24" (Nobel Seal TS) cover on each side of crack, subject to manufacturer's instructions relative to specific conditions. Roll installed membrane with weighted roller as prescribed by membrane manufacturer. Protect installed membrane from traffic and install fmish material within time requirements established by membrane manufacturer. C. Level uneven areas with self - leveling and/or mortar screed underlayment as conditions dictate. Level substrate surfaces to within 1/8" in 10' -0 ". Where this is not possible with underlayment due to high spot on existing slab, grind off high spots and install underlayment. Substrate shall be sufficiently flat to ensure a maximum lippage of 1 /16" (thickness of a penny) between adjacent tiles. D. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. E. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. F. Prepare slab edges abutting horizontal materials designated to remain to ensure a flush transition acrose surface of existing and new material. G. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION. GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of file installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CERAMIC TILE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09300 - 6 the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown in the floor covering plan details, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Pieces of file smaller than one half file are unacceptable. Provide uniform joint widths to match existing. F. Expansion and Control Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant - filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 1. Locate expansion joints at column centerlines, unless otherwise indicated. Control joints shall be 3 /16" wide and consistent with TCA Handbook Method EJ171. 2. Locate joints in tile surfaces within '/2 tile width above joints or cracks in substrates which have received crack isolation membrane. 3. Joints are to set on Bostik/Hryoment - Ultra set minimum 30 mils thick the width of the tile as recommended by the manufacturer where CTC control joints are set. 4. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" where tile abuts vertical surfaces. 5. Expansion joints shall be installed only across and never along the floor aisles with ceramic tile. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CERAMIC TILE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09300 - 7 G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards. 1. For latex - portland cement grouts, comply with ANSI A108.10. 3.3 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS A. Porcelain Floor Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types: 1. Sales Area Floors: Latex - Portland Cement Mortar and Grout; ANSI A118.4 & A118.6. a. Concrete Subfloors: TCA F113. b. Grout: Latex -ANSI A108.10. B. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. C. Reducer Strips: Install with epoxy adhesive where exposed edge of tile flooring meets exposed concrete floor surface. 3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS A. Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements indicated below for setting -bed methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout types: 1. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.4 and A 118.6. a. Metal Studs, Interior: TCA W243. b. Grout: Latex -ANSI A 108.10. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave fmished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) CERAMIC TILE 09300 - 8 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Protect installed floor tile work with kraft paper and 1/4" tempered masonite with taped joints covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. Protection shall be removed when directed by Sears Project Manager and it may be at any time after construction substantial completion but prior to store opening. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed except when shorter curing time is specifically approved by mortar and grout manufacturer. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) END OF SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE 09300 - 9 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1_2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceilings composed of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Systems" for ceilings. 2. Divisions 15 and 16 for ceiling diffusers, grilles, sprinkler heads, and light fixtures. 1_3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. L4 OUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single - Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. B. Single - Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 -1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. L7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system components and partition assemblies. L88 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials to the Owner, at designated location, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full -size units equal to 10.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Armstrong or equal. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 2 B. Match existing tile. 2_2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and fmishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. 1. Powder - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attachment of hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing agency. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc - Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch (2.69-min-) diameter wire. D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with rust- inhibitive paint. E. Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details: formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. F. Hold -Down Clips for Non - Fire - Resistance -Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings composed of acoustical panels weighing less than 11b per sq. ft. provide hold -down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 3 23 NON- FIRE= RESISTANCE =RATED, DIRECT =HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 1. Structural Classification: Heavy -duty system, 1' /2' high, tees. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc - coated, cold - rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16 -inch (24 -mm -) wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type, as standard with manufacturer; 1'A" high, tees. 3. Cap Material and Finish: Sheet steel with white baked paint finish. B. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. Armstrong "Prelude 7300 Series;" 15/16" face dimension double web hot - dip galvanized steel; heavy -duty, white color to match existing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast -in -place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 4 Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 3. CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA "Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings." 4. CISCA Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies." 5. U.B.C. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No. 47 -18. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511- 5 that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail - due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of 4 tight turns. Fasten bracing wires to concrete with post installed anchors. 7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fasten hangers to powder - actuated fasteners, or drilled -in anchors that extend through forms into concrete. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. D. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space. b. Install panels with lead edge located in same direction. 2. Install hold -down clips within 20 feet of exterior door openings and in areas required by governing regulations, space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. 3. Provide bracing wires at each corner of lighting fixtures and air ducts. 4. Seal perimeter of light fixtures by cutting panels to plane of reveal and gasketing flanges. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511- 6 L s 3_4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 7 SECTION 09660 - RESILIENT BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. L2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient wall base. 1.3 DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING A. Receive base at Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50! (10C) and 901 (32C). L4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70! (21 C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55! (13C). B. Do not install base units until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install base after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Vinyl wall base: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL RESILIENT BASE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09660 - 1 1. Kentile, type Kencove vinyl wall base, color - As selected by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION J. EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where installation of base will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for base installation and comply with base manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. 12 INSTALLATION A. Comply with base manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements. B. Scribe, cut, and fit base to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built -in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds and nosings. C. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. D. Apply base at all non tile finished walls constructed as part of this contract. 22 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing base installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by base manufacturer. 2. Wash to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect base against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 09660 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL RESILIENT BASE NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09660 - 2 SECTION 09680 - CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1A RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the provisions of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prepare surfaces to receive carpeting. B. Apply glue down carpeting on floor and base surfaces where indicated, complete with required accessories. C. Install edge strips where carpeting terminates at other flooring finishes 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in carpet installation with not less than three (3) years of documented experience. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive carpeting materials in original mill protective wrapping, with mill register numbers and tags attached. B. Store inside, in well ventilated area, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and ceilings and overhead work has been tested, approved and completed. B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to installation, and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be maintained. C. Provide sufficient lighting. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) CARPETING 09680 - 1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 L r A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and other substances which would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Iwo Allow floors to thoroughly dry. B. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1 /4 inch in 10 feet, , noncumulative. C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality ,,,, relative to acidity and alkalinity. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Signed by Installer, agreeing to reinstall defective workmanship of carpet work during two (2) year period following date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carpet: Furnished by Sears. B. Carpet Type: Broadloom with "Unibond" backing glue down or carpet tile type at all locations. C. Adhesive: Furnished by Sears. D. Nonmetallic Edge Strips: Furnished by Sears. E. Carpet Base: Carpet furnished by Sears, cutting to 4" base dimension and binding of top edge with approved thread color by carpet installer. F. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide seaming tape, thread, nails, and other items recommended by carpet manufacturer and installer for the indicated conditions of carpet use and as required for complete installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION D. Use an approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes and for leveling. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CARPETING 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09680 - 2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 12 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAY A. Install underlay using maximum sized pieces. Securely adhere to subfloor. Lay out underlay so that carpet seams will not fall directly over seams. B. Butt edges firmly together and tight to edge of carpet gripper. Tape all joints. C. Remove air pockets and ridges and slightly stretch. Anchor securely around projections and contours. INSTALLATION OF CARPET (OVER UNDERLAY) 3.3 A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Sears Project Manager approval. _ B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots and matches adjacent existing carpet as appli cable. C. Cut carpet, where required, in a manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unframed. D. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. E. Join seams in recommended manner and so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. F. Lay carpet on floors with run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. Lay carpet on stairs with the run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic to avoid peeking of backing at nosings. G. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next. H. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces. Where wall bases are scheduled, cut carpet 1 /4 inch from walls to allow for possible re- stretching. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surface where no base is scheduled, leaving no gaps. I. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum twenty -four (24) hours or until adhesive has set. J. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at edges, and present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) CARPETING 09680 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 L Ilb tire Ilror MM K. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush. 14 INSTALLATION OF CARPET (GLUE DOWN) A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Sears Project Manager approval. B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots and matches adjacent existing carpet as applicable. C. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unframed. D. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. E. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps. F. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set. G. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. Lay carpet on stairs with run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic to avoid peeking of backing at nosing. H. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening. I. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces. J. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled, leaving no gaps. K. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of twenty -four (24) hours or until adhesive is set. L. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at edges, and present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) CARPETING 09680 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 M. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush. Install carpet base at all Sales Area walls with carpet flooring and other areas as designated. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) END OF SECTION 09680 CARPETING 09680 - 5 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 10 in SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. L 1_2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation priming, painting, and finishing of exposed interior items and surfaces indicated to be painted. 2. Surface preparation, priming, and fmish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop - priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies" C. Scope of Work: 1. Painting includes field- painting sales floor drywall soffits and ceilings. 2. Paint surfaces of partitions and column enclosures in sales area where new gypsum board was applied as part of this project. 3. Paint surfaces exposed to view, whether or not colors or materials are designated including overhead dock sectional doors, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted. Where an item or surface is not specifically referenced, paint the same color as similar adjacent surfaces. If finish is not designated, the Architect will designate finish and color. 4. Painting is not required on pre - finished items, fmished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels, unless indicated otherwise to be field painted to match an adjacent finish. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) a. Pre - finished items not to be painted include factory- fmished components, unless indicated above. PAINTING 09900 -1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 L3 SUBMITTALS b. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in inaccessible areas. c. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment. d. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code - required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers. 1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. 2. List each material and cross - reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. 3. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PAINTING 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09900 - 2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 1.4 DALITY ASSURANCE a. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide two 12-mch square samples for each color and finish. Step samples to show undercoats. A. Applicator Qilifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in- service performance. B. Single- Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other painted components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full -coat fmish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in -place work. 1. Final acceptance of colors and quality of application will be from job- applied samples. 2. The Owner§ Representative will select a 100 sq. ft. surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings to designated surface according to the schedule or as specified. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) a. Repeat designated applications as necessary for acceptance by Architect. b. After finishes are accepted, this surface will be used to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. c. Accepted surfaces may remain as part of the finished work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. PAINTING 09900 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 4. Contents by volume for pigment and 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well - ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 °F (7 °C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freeing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health haards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. L6 PROECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 8 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 °F (3 °C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. B. Apply paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 °F (10 °C) and 90 °F (32 °C). L7 ATTIC STOCK A. Provide two gallons, clearly labeled of each color and sheen of each product used, including primers, undercoats and finished coats. Deliver to Owner on project site, where directed by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. The Glidden Company (Glidden). SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) PAINTING 09900 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 3 Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG). 5. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). 6. The Sherwin- Williams Company (S -W). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS. GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Qtlity: Provide the manufacturer's best - quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. C. Colors: Provide custom colors of the fmished paint systems to match the Architect's samples. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory- formulated primers that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Gypsum Drywall Primer: White, interior, latex -based primer. a. Devoe: 5081 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. b. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. c. Moore: Moore's Latex Qck -Dry Prime Seal 1101. d. PPG: 6 -2 tick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer. e. P & L: Latex Wall Primer x0001. f. S -W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B2W200. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) PAINTING 09900 - 5 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 2.4 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory- formulated finish- coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Interior, Flat, Latex -Based Paint: Ready - mixed, latex -based paint for a satin finish. a. Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Satin Wall Paint. b. Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint. c. Moore: Regal Wall Satin 1115. d. PPG: 8 Line Wallhide Satin Latex Paint. e. P & L: Vapex Latex Satin Wall Finish. f. S -W: Classic 99 Latex Eg -Shel B 30W200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) PAINTING 09900 - 6 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 A. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface- applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 3.2 PREPARATION B. Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. lr C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re -prime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.3 APPLICATION 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. A. Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) • PAINTING 09900 - 7 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and fmishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions. 4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built -in fixtures, convector covers, covers for fmned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non - specular black paint. 8 Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field- finished casework to match exterior. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch -up painted. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PAINTING 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09900 - 8 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 w as C. Scheduling Painting: Apply fast coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not re -coat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 1. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of paint, as L recommended by the paint manufacturer, to substrate that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime- coated by others. Re -coat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn - through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, irregularity in texture, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.4 CLEANING 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice sie as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, .remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) PAINTING 09900 - 9 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint - spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide Wet Painnigns to protect ne wly painted fmishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B. Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two coats. a. Primer: White, interior, latex -based primer. b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900 -10 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 kit SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirement for mechanical trades. 2. Materials. 3. Equipment electrical characteristics. B. Related Sections: 1. General Requirements - Division 1 Sections. 2. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Section 15600. 1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Mechanical Drawings and Specifications are intended to describe complete systems as shown on the Drawings and as specified in appropriate Section. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary, and work shown but not specified, or specified but not shown, shall be the same as though required by both. B. Minor items and accessories or devices reasonably inferable as necessary to the ok `" complete and proper operation of any system shall be provided for such system whether or not they are specifically shown or specified. g C. Drawings for mechanical system are diagrammatic and illustrate the general arrangements of ductwork, equipment, etc. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 �'' 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15050 -1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections. B. Shop Drawings: Detailed, dimensioned shop drawings as stipulated in the other Articles of these specifications. 1. The following coordinated shop drawings shall be submitted for review: a. All new equipment C. Manufacturers' Literature: Manufacturers' literature and data sheets shall be submitted indicating the necessary installation dimensions, weights, materials, and performance information. The performance shall include capacities, pressure drop, design and operating pressure, temperatures, and similar data. Complete electrical data, including power conditions, and identifying types and numbers, shall be included. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The Contractor shall furnish data covering model, type and serial numbers, capacities, maintenance and operation of recessed ceiling heaters in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.5 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits; arrange and pay for all related governmental inspections. Provide additional materials, parts, etc. and modify the Work as required by governmental inspections and regulations. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. The Contractor shall warrant all new mechanical work in accordance with the General Conditions. Repairs, or replacements shall bear additional warranties. Warranties beyond twelve (12) months shall be special written warranties. Special warranties shall apply even though they exceed product warranties normally furnished by manufacturer. Warranties shall extend from the date of substantial completion of the project and not from the date of acceptance, or installation, of an item or device. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Use only new materials of best quality of their respective kinds. 1. Material shall be manufactured by reputable manufacturers who have been producing the specified type of material to be sold and distributed in every major SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15050 - 2 city in the United States for a minimum period of five (5) years unless otherwise noted herein. All items containing electrical components shall be U.L. listed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. Labor shall be performed rapidly, consistent with the Project Schedule, and in a workmanlike manner, to the satisfaction of the GC, Architect and Owner. 3.2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation, lubrication and maintenance of all equipment. B. Where applicable, copies of the National Board Certificates and of the operational test reports shall be bound with the manual. 3.3 COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Cleaning Equipment, Completed Work and Premises: After the completion of all installations, each system shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all paint and oil and other foreign material. Each contractor shall also clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels and stickers, etc., from all fixtures, equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., accumulated from his operation from the premises. B. Demonstration: At the conclusion of his work and before final contract payment is made, each mechanical contractor shall demonstrate and explain to the Using Agency's personnel the function, operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems installed by him. This shall include at least one (1) session and shall be of session length as Architect/Engineer may direct. END OF SECTION 15050 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15050 - 3 SECTION 15300 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Section Includes: 1. Automatic Sprinkler System. B. Visit the site to determine existing conditions and extent of work to coordinate with the work of the other trades to establish a major routing of the piping and elevations. C. Complete fire protection system as outlined in these specifications, including all labor, materials and shop drawings needed to furnish and install a complete and functional automatic sprinkler system, including all of the following: 1. All trim, fittings, offsets, hangers and accessories, necessary to provide a complete and functional system. 2. Coordination of work with all other trades. 3. Shop drawings; including materials, Hydraulic Calculations and Piping Design. Submit and Obtain approval as required by local jurisdiction. 4. Operating instructions and valve diagrams 5. Record drawings. 6. Sleeves. 7. All required system testing. 8. All sprinkler heads between walls, and baffles, cornices and junction displays, or other obstructions. 9. Warranty of all materials and labor. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 -1 imi L imw 10. Pay for all permits, fees, state, federal and local taxes, and charges required for this work. D. Related Sections: 1. Division #01. 2. Division #15. 3. Division #16. E. Related Items: 1. Cutting and patching. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. C. AWS: American Welding Society. D. AWWA: American Water Works Association. E. FM: Factory Mutual. F. FMRC: Factory Mutual Research Corporation. G. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association. H. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Approved: Unless otherwise stated, materials, equipment or submittals approved by the authority having jurisdiction. B. Concealed: Where used in connection with installation of piping or conduit and Yor accessories, shall mean "hidden from sight" as in shafts, furred spaces, in soffits or above suspended ceilings. b- C. Contractor: The company awarded the prime contract for this work and any of its sub - subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or fabricators. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 2 D. Exposed: Where used in connection with installation of piping or conduit and accessories, shall mean "visible" or "not concealed." E. FM Approved: Materials or equipment approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation and included in the most recent edition of the FM Approval Guide. F. Furnish: Supply materials. G. GPM: Gallons per minute. H. Install: Install materials, mount and connect equipment or assemblies. I. Owner: Sears, Roebuck and Co. J. Provide: Furnish, install and connect. K. psi: Pounds per square inch. L. Remove: Remove material and equipment and restore surface. M. UL Listed: Materials or equipment listed by UL and included in the most recent edition of the UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory or other appropriate UL directory. This listing indicates that periodic inspections of the production of listed equipment or materials are made and that the equipment or materials satisfy UL standards and have been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sprinkler System Design Criteria: In accordance with applicable NFPA standards, local authority requirements and the following criteria: 1. Sales Areas, Offices, Customer Service Area and small perimeter stockrooms with shelving and 11 -12 foot high ceilings: a. Sprinkler system with 1/2 -inch sprinkler orifice and a nominal K factor of 5.6, spaced to a maximum of 130 square feet per sprinkler. This system shall be designed to provide 0.18 GPM per square foot to the most remote 2,500 square foot area with a combined hose demand of 250 GPM at the nearest hydrant. 2. Sprinkler system pipe sizing shall be determined by hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 and the requirements of this specification. 1.6 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 • QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Approval Agency: Factory Mutual Engineering (FM) and Underwriter's Laboratory (UL). B. Regulatory Agencies: State and local building codes and ordinances, fire department and Fire Prevention Bureau requirements, and the requirements of FM shall apply. C. Reference Standards: The following standards are included as part of this specification as applicable: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) as listed: a. NFPA 13, 25, 231, 231C, 20, 24, 14, 14A, etc. Standard for the Installation of Sprinlder Systems, 1989 edition. 2. Factory Mutual (FM) Data Sheets (2 -8N, 3 -26, 4-4N, 8 -3, 8 -9, and others as applicable). 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication: Fire Protection Equipment List. 4. State/County/Local codes. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Submittal Procedures: 1. Contractor shall submit required number of prints and receive approval from the local and state Fire Prevention Bureaus, the Building Department and any other local/state authorities having jurisdiction over the project site. 2. Review of the shop drawing submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to comply with the contract, plans, specifications, NFPA requirements, and state and local codes requirements. 3. Where any devices which are provided or furnished involve work by another contractor, submit additional data copies directly to that contractor. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 4 C. Shop Drawings: 1. Prepare shop drawings at minimum scale of 1/8" inch equals 1' -0" for plans, and 1 /< inch equals 1' -0" for details. Show all piping, elevations of piping, sprinlders, hangers, type of pipe, tube connections, outlets, flexible couplings, roof construction, and occupancy of each area, including ceiling and roof heights as required by NFPA 13. When welding is planned, shop drawings shall indicate the sections to be shop welded and the type of welded fittings to be used. Shop drawings shall indicate all information required by bid design document and NFPA 13. 2. Fire protection system shop drawings shall include separate and complete reflected ceiling plans indicating the location of each sprinkler, as well as piping layouts. Provide additional sprinklers (over code minimum quantities) if requested by the Architect, to obtain symmetrical ceiling layouts. 3. Hydraulic calculations shall be submitted with the shop drawings. a. Hydraulic calculations shall include a water supply graph and hydraulic cover sheet. The cover sheet shall include the name and location of the calculated area, ceiling height, occupancy, design criteria, sprinlder spacing, system type, sprinlder make, model, size, K factor and temperature rating, flow requirements, C factor used, water supply data and source of information, commodity storage class, height and configuration, and all other information required by NFPA 13. b. A safety factor of 5 psi or 10 percent, whichever is higher, shall be used when developing hydraulic calculations as required by the Sears insurance underwriter. c. Catalog cuts of all the material equipment and fittings. 4. Design shall be based upon actual survey and all of the latest architectural, structural, heating and ventilating, plumbing, electrical, and Owner's fixture, rack and equipment drawings. 5. Contractor shall submit complete submittal packages. Partial submittals will be rejected. 6. Contractor shall not start work until the shop drawings, catalog cuts and hydraulic calculations have been reviewed and accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Any changes to work that have not been reviewed shall be at the Contractor's own expense. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 5 r D. Manufacturer's Data: Provide data from manufacturer on the following devices, +�- including installation, maintenance, and testing procedures, dimensions, wiring diagrams, etc. �► 1. Sprinklers and escutcheons. 2. Pipe, fittings and hangers. 3. All other system components. E. Record Drawings: 1. Maintain at the site and up -to -date marked set of record drawings which shall be corrected and delivered to the Owner upon completion of the work. 2. Upon completion, furnish the Owner with one reproducible sepia print and one blueline print of each shop drawing, revised to show actual conditions. F. Test Reports: Upon completion of final inspections and tests, as required by FM Data Sheets and appropriate NFPA standards, submit copies of Standard Contractor's Material and Test Certificates for piping. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS A. Deliver all materials to area of project designated by the Owner's representative. Vehicles shall not block fire lanes or fire doors during delivery of materials. B. Store all materials within area designated by the Owner's representative. At the end of each working day, return all materials to the designated area. Materials, equipment, tools, etc. will not be left outside the storage area without the consent of the Owner's representative. C. Assume responsibility for the cost of all material handling, delivery and freight. D. Maintain the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by this work. At the completion of the work, remove all surplus materials, tools, etc., and leave the premises clean to the Owner's satisfaction. 1.9 WARRANTY v A. This Contractor shall provide a one -year written warranty against defects in material and workmanship furnished under this contract. The costs of such warranty shall be part of the purchase price. The warranty commences when the system and installation are accepted by the Owner and Engineer. V SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 6 B. The warranty shall include all necessary material, travel, labor and parts to replace defective components or materials at the job site. C. Commence repair of any "in guarantee" defects within 18 hours of notification of such defects. D. Make allowances in the warranty to cover diagnosis of system defects which might ultimately be the responsibility of others to correct. Notify the Owner and other affected trades when this occurs. E. Provide emergency repair service for the sprinlder system within four hours of a request for such service by the Owner during the warranty period. This service shall be available on a 24 -hour per day, seven -day per week basis. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials shall be FMRC approved and UL listed on NFPA 13. B. All components shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and their FMRC approval and UL listing. C. The naming of manufacturers in the specifications shall not be construed as eliminating the materials, products or services of other manufacturers and suppliers providing approved equivalent items. D. The substitutions of materials or products other than those named in the specifications are subject to written approval by the Owner. 2.2 OVERHEAD PIPING A. All pipe shall be FMRC approved and meet the requirements of NFPA 13. Pipe shall be new, designed for 175 psi minimum working pressure, conforming to ASTM specifications, and have the manufacturer's name and brand along with the applicable ASTM standard marked on each length of pipe. 2.3 FITTINGS 1. Steel: Steel piping shall be black or galvanized. (Galvanized to be used for dry- pipe systems.) A. Change of direction, unless otherwise noted, shall be accomplished by the use of fittings suitable for use in sprinlder systems, as defined in NFPA 13. Fittings exposed to outside atmosphere shall be galvanized. Bushings shall not be used SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 7 unless written approval is obtained from the Engineer. Additional fittings, pipe and hangers required by site conditions shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Grooved fittings shall be joined using rubber gaskets from the same manufacturer. Gaskets shall be listed for use for the appropriate application (wet or dry system). C. All fittings shall be compatible with the piping and UL listed and FM approved for use with the piping to be installed. D. Push -on fittings shall not be used. 2.4 SPRINKLERS A. Sales Areas, Offices and Consumer Service Area: Chrome plated semi - recessed, 165 degree (F) temperature rated sprinklers with two -piece escutcheons. 2.5 OTHER COMPONENTS A. Hangers: 1. Inserts, powder driven studs, expansion cases or Phillips -type shells shall be installed to support the 1 -inch through 4 -inch size sprinkler piping below concrete construction. Inserts shall also be installed for all 5 -inch or larger piping below concrete construction. In lieu of the inserts, expansion cases spaced not more than 10 feet apart may be installed in accordance with NFPA 13. Powder driven studs shall be tested in accordance with FM data sheet 2 -8N and NFPA 13. 2. Use beam clamps to hang piping from top chord or joist below steel deck and joist construction. Do not hang piping from bottom chord or bridging. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Changes: Changes to sprinlder drawings shall be limited to necessary revisions required for coordination, approved by the authority of jurisdiction. Make no changes in sprinkler the layout as shown on the drawings. This does not include minor revisions for the purpose of coordination. B. Clean -Up: 1. Maintain the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by this work. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 8 2. At the completion of the work, remove all surplus materials, tools, etc., and leave the premises clean. C. Overhead Piping: 1. All sprinkler piping, drain and test piping, fire department connection piping, etc., exposed to weather shall be galvanized. 2. All sprinkler piping must be substantially supported from the building structure and only approved type hangers shall be used. Sprinkler lines under ducts shall not be supported from ductwork, but shall be supported from the building structure with trapeze hangers where necessary or from steel angles supporting ductwork in accordance with NFPA 13. 3. Sprinklers below ceilings which are on exposed piping shall be listed and approved regular bronze upright type, in upright position, except listed and approved regular bronze pendent type in pendent position which may be used on wet pipe systems where necessary due to clear height requirements, duct interferences, etc. 4. Pendent sprinklers shall be in alignment and parallel to walls, etc. 2. Pendent sprinklers shall be located within a minimum of 4 inches from the ceiling "T" bar. 3. Adjustable escutcheons shall not be used. 4. Sprig -ups shall be provided wherever necessary to provide proper deflector distances in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements. 5. Sprinkler piping shall be installed above ceilings. Layout the sprinkler piping so that there is a minimum separation of 12 inches between the ceiling height and the bottom of the sprinkler pipe. 6. Install sprinkler piping in exposed areas as high as possible using necessary fittings and auxiliary drains to maintain maximum clear head room. 7. Install sprinklers as required by NFPA 13 with regard to ducts, obstructions and partitions. 8. Complete sprinlder installation and place in service during hours when the Owner's facilities are not open to the public or for standard business in all areas where merchandise or fixtures are stored in place. D. Adjustment and Cleaning: SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 9 imu 1. Adjustment: Remove all burrs from pipe threads and fittings, and all debris and foreign material from inside all pipe and fittings before installation. Correct all system leaks prior to fmal acceptance test. 2. Cleaning: Flush all piping in accordance with NFPA standards for test procedures. E. Drains: 1. Provide main drain valves at system control valves, sized in accordance with NFPA 13. Drains should discharge outside the building. 3.2 WELDING 2. Provide all auxiliary drains where necessary, extended to a safe location. 3. Pipe all drains and auxiliary drains to locations where water drained will not damage stock, equipment, vehicles, planted areas, etc., or injure personnel. 4. Plugs used for auxiliary drains shall be brass. 5. All piping and fittings downstream of drain valve shall be galvanized. 6. High and low pressure drains shall not be connected together. F. Ceiling and Wall Plates: Install finished ceiling and wall plates wherever exposed sprinkler piping passes through floors, ceilings and walls. G. Sleeves: 1. Set sleeves in place for all pipes passing through floor openings. 2. Space between sleeve and pipe shall be filled with noncombustible fire - stopping. Ratings of fire -rated walls shall be maintained. Provide chrome finished wall plates at each side of the wall. A. No field welding of sprinkler piping shall be permitted. B. Headers, risers, feed mains, cross mains and branch lines may be shop welded using acceptable welding fittings. Welding and torch cutting shall not be permitted as a means of installing or repairing sprinkler systems. C. Provide a blind flange or grooved cap and coupling at each end of the welder header. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 -10 D. Certify welders or brazers as being qualified for welding and/or brazing, in accordance with the requirements of AWS D 10.9, Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing Level AR -3. E. Comply with NFPA 13. 3.3 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTIONS A. Per NFPA 13, at required points for testing each waterflow alarm device. Special discharge nozzle shall have the same size orifice as the smallest orifice sprinklers installed. B. Provide a 1 -inch sight glass if inspector's test discharge cannot be readily observed while operating valve. C. Pipe all inspector's test connections discharging to atmosphere, to a location where water drained will not damage stock, equipment, vehicles, planted areas, etc., or injure personnel. D. Splash blocks shall be provided where inspector's test discharge could produce damage to surroundings. E. All pipe and fittings downstream of the inspector's test valve shall be galvanized. F. Consult with Sears Project Manager for exact location of inspector's test connections and coordinate with latest revision of the fixturing drawing. G. Identify inspector's test valve. 3.4 SPRINKLER GUARDS AND WATER SHIELDS A. Provide guards on sprinlders within 7 feet of the finished floor or wherever sprinlders may be subject to mechanical damage. B. Install sheet metal water shield (5 -inch minimum diameter) over each intermediate rack sprinkler or install special listed sprinklers manufactured with integral water shields, as shown on the drawings. 3.5 SPECIALTY DEVICES A. Installation of all specialty devices shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where the installation of those devices require use of a torque wrench or other appliance, the Contractor shall certify that manufacturer's instructions have been complied with. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 -11 • L • r 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Installer shall be responsible for all tests required during the course of installation. B. Testing Overhead Piping: Test all overhead sprinkler piping for a period of two hours, in accordance with NFPA 13. All piping, valves, sprinklers, etc. shall be watertight. Test dry pipe systems at an air pressure of 40 psi for 24 hours. Notify the Owner's representative(s) 48 hours in advance regarding the time and date of all tests. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Damage: Protect all unfinished work to prevent damage and furnish protection of all surrounding areas where necessary. B. Leak Damage: The Contractor shall be responsible during the installation and testing periods of the sprinkler system for any damage to the work of others, to the building or its contents caused by leaks in any equipment, by unplugged or disconnected pipes or fittings, or by overflow, and shall pay for the necessary replacements or repairs to work of others damaged by such leakage. C. Water shall not be introduced into the system during conditions where there is danger of freezing. END OF SECTION 15300 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 -12 SECTION 15600= HEATING, VENTILATION AND CONDITIONING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: heating and air conditioning work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1. Low pressure supply, air ductwork distribution systems. 2. Ceiling diffusers. 3. Electric recessed ceiling heaters. 4. Insulated flexible duct work. 5. Testing and balancing of new ceiling diffusers. B. Related Sections: 1. Painting: Section 09900. 2. Basic Mech. Materials & Methods: Section 15050. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division- 1 Specification Sections. B. Manufacturer's Literature: Specifications, installation and maintenance instruction for all equipment. Furnish data covering model, type and serial number, capacities, maintenance and operation of each item of equipment. Operating instructions shall cover all phases of control, maintenance and usage. C. Test Reports: Furnish test reports on balancing of the new ceiling diffusers, certified by the Contractor. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL HEATING, VENTILATION AND 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 15600 -1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 Iwo 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cooperate with others involved in other parts of the Work, for the proper location of piping, outlets and equipment before the installation of same. B. Examine the Drawings and Specifications in connection with other parts of the Work and inform the Architect of anticipated conflicts. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC RECESSED CEILING HEATERS, A. Shall be Markel, Chromolox, Berko, or Aztec as scheduled on the drawings. B. All units shall bear the U.L. label. C. Units shall be 208 volt, single phase, as indicated on drawings. Ceiling heaters shall have built -in thermostats. D. Heaters shall be furnished with necessary contractors, relays, control transformers and thermal cut -outs. Where required by NEC provide internal fusing in the units of electric radiation. Recessed ceiling heaters shall have built -in disconnect switches. E. The electric heaters shall be furnished by the firm performing the work of Division 15, Electric Wiring and installation will be by Division 16. 2.2 DUCTWORK A. Flexible ducts. 1. New connections to air diffusers shall be flexible ducts equal to Wiremold Type WG with 1" thick insulation, Anco or United. 2. Shall be UL -181 Class 1 approved for use with pressures up to 10" W.C. positive and 2" W.C. negative. 3. Flexible duct connections shall be no longer than 5' -0 ". 2.3 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Air distribution devices shall be Titus, Metalaire, Krueger, or Carnes. t ,,, ; B. All ceiling mounted distributors shall have factory applied baked white enamel finish. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL HEATING, VENTILATION AND 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 15600 -2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 C. All ceiling diffusers shall be equipped with opposed blade volume dampers operable from the face side with screwdriver adjustment. E. All square faced round neck ceiling diffusers shall be Titus louver faced face Model TDC with Type 3 (lay -in) border. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DUCTWORK A. Ductwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. B. Volume dampers shall be provided in each supply duct connection at locations where required to accomplish proper air balancing. Provide operator suitable for the function of the damper. C. Flexible ducts shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and the terms of its UL listing. They shall not exceed 5 feet in length, and shall make connections by use of a sheet metal collar and a stainless steel circular clamp. Clamp shall encircle the duct completely, and shall be tightened with a worm gear operator, or similar to the point that will provide an airtight connection without unnecessary deformation of the duct. D. At no time shall duct work be exposed to rain, snow, dust, or dirt. Any ductwork which has been so exposed shall not be installed on this project. If exposure has occurred after installation, it shall be removed and replaced with new, clean ductwork. 3.02 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Coordinate all trim and hardware associated with devices in each particular installation. B. Refer to Architectural Drawings of reflected ceilings for proper locations of devices in finished ceilings. C. All devices shall be properly assigned and alignment shall conform to the basic building lines. 3.03 LEAKAGE TEST A. After ductwork is installed but before any work is concealed, each new duct system shall be subjected to a leakage test to demonstrate its tightness. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL HEATING, VENTILATION AND 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 15600 - 3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 m Mw B. Leakage test shall be performed in accordance with method outlined in the "Manual for the Balancing and Adjusting of Air Distribution Systems ", Latest Edition, published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). C. A final leakage test shall be performed. Results of final leakage test shall be recorded on a form and submitted to the Architect. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT OF VENTILAT1NG SYSTEM A. Provide the services of an approved engineer that specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems to balance, adjust and test new ceiling diffusers. B. Balance and testing shall not begin until the systems have been completed and are in full working order. C. Upon completion of the airside system installations, the Balance and Testing Engineer shall perform the tests, compile the test data. D. Testing and balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with latest AABC Standard for Field Measurement and Instrumentation Form as published by the aforementioned council, with calibrated instruments including certification of same. All test data shall be recorded on official data sheets, dated and initialed by Contractor. E. Three certified copies of the tests shall be furnished to the Architect. END OF SECTION 15600 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL HEATING, VENTILATION AND 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 15600 - 4 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 SECTION 16050 - - BASIC MATERIALS METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1_1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work included but not limited to: a. New lighting b. Modification to existing lighting c. Exit signs. d. Wiring devices. e. All the suspended conduits shall run next to the underside of the roof deck and upper level structures unless there are interferences with other installations and if so, Contractor shall submit shop drawings for approval before the installation begins. 2. Products installed by the Contractor, but furnished by others as indicated in Sections 16500 and 16600. 3. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications shall be understood to cover complete operating systems. The Drawings and Specifications are to be taken together. Work specified and not shown, or work shown and not specified shall be performed or furnished as though mentioned in both Drawings and Specifications. 4. Minor items and accessories reasonably inferred as necessary to the complete and proper operation of any system, shall be provided by this Contractor or Subcontractor for such systems. B. Related Sections: 1. General, Special and Supplementary Conditions. 2. Division 1, Specification Sections. 3. 03300 - Concrete. 4. 16500 - Lighting. 5. 16600 - Special Systems. 6. - See Divisions 2 thru 15, for additional equipment to be connected, under Division 16. L2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the General and Special Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Cable and wire. L3 QUALITY ASSURANCE SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -1 Qualifications: ,,,, 1. Of Contractor: Provide adequate skilled workmen, properly supervised and sufficient quantities of materials and equipment to the end that the general progress of the work shall not be delayed. Employ at all times during the work, a competent superintendent who will be present and responsible for the correctness of work. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: int 1. Permits: Obtain and pay for all permits and inspection fees required for the execution of electrical contract work. See Supplementary Conditions. 2. Building Codes: All work shall conform to the latest accepted National Electrical Code (NEC) and all rules of other local enforcing agencies. 3. Tests by independent agencies whose classifications, standards and requirements have general acceptance as regulatory: a. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM). b. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). c. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). d. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). L4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Sequencing, Scheduling: 1. Conform to construction schedule. 2. Cooperate with others working on the premises to facilitate progress and to coordinate and integrate all parts of work. B. Seismic Areas: 1. All equipment, piping, etc. in seismic areas shall be mounted and braced per local seismic codes. 1.5 GUARANTEE A. Furnish a written guarantee stating that all materials and workmanship are guaranteed against defects for a period of one (1) year after completion and acceptance of work. Defects due to faulty material and workmanship developed during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily replaced by the Contractor at his expense. L6 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050-2 A. See Section 01500, Temporary Utilities, regarding temporary lighting and power and temporary service. 1_7 SAFETY A. The Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods and sequences of construction, and for the safety of workers and others on the construction site. 1.8 CO- ORDINATION A. Inspect Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Fire Protection Drawings for dimensions, locations of partitions and walls, structural details, and location of mechanical pipes and ducts so that the electrical installation shall be in harmony with that of the other trades. B. Exact location of equipment furnished by the other trades and wired by this Contractor shall be obtained from the Drawings of the other trades. C. Field verify existing conditions prior to bid so as to include conditions which may impact this contractor's work. D. Electrical work will be completed under separate contracts. Refer to drawing for scope of work. Coordinate with other contractor and cooperate fully. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new and shall be put in place in a complete and workmanlike manner. They shall bear Underwriters' Label where such service is normally provided. B. Where existing materials are shown to be re -used, this contractor shall field verify the suitability /compatibility of such materials. Existing materials found suitable for re -use shall be tested and guaranteed as if new. 2_2 INDEX 1. 2.3 Conduit and Fittings 2. 2.4 Pull and Junction Boxes 3. 2.5 Outlet Boxes 4. 2.6 Cable and Wire 5. 2.7 Wall Switches 6. 2.8 Wall Receptacles 7. 2.9 Plates 2.3 CONDUIT AND 1-111INGS SEARS AT SOUrHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -3 1.m liava r. A. Steel Conduit: Hot dip galvanized heavy wall steel conduit, Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) and electric metallic tubing (EMT) as manufactured by Triangle Conduit and Cable Company or LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. B. PVC Conduit: Rigid heavy wall as manufactured by Triangle, or Carlon. C. All Conduit Fittings: Galvanized when used with steel conduit. Fittings as manufactured by Thomas and Betts or Appleton Electric Products Company. E.M.T. connectors and couplings shall be "set- screw" type. D. For conduits 1 -1/4" and larger, provide insulating bushings as manufactured by Thomas and Betts Company or Appleton Electric Products Company. E. Metal clad cable (type MC) See N.E.C. Article 334, (See Section 16050, Paragraph 3.06). Use is permitted subject to approval by the Local Code. 2.4 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes: Code gauge galvanized steel of size required, furnished with two coats of aluminum paint after fabrication at shop. Provide removable blank covers. B. Concealed Junction Boxes: Galvanized deep box with extension ring and blank cover. Exposed junction boxes shall be cast with threaded hubs. 2.5 OUTLET BOXES A. Each switch, light, receptacle and other miscellaneous device shall be provided with galvanized or sherardized pressed steel outlet box of the knockout type, as manufactured by All Steel Equipment, Inc., Raco or Appleton. Conduits shall be fastened with locknuts and bushings and all unused knockouts must be left sealed. There must be sufficient room for wires and bushings and deep boxes shall be installed where required. B. All ceiling outlet boxes shall be deep type with screw covers and shall have adequate support to carry weight of fixtures. Where boxes and conduits leading to them are embedded in concrete, sufficient support will be considered as having been provided. Otherwise Contractor shall furnish and install suitable means for fastening box to framing or floor slab. C. Where outlets are installed in concrete or other construction where final finish is to be plaster, furnish and install plaster rings with recessed covers on all such outlets. Where other finishes are to be applied, install extension rings as required. D. This Contractor shall furnish and install all special outlet boxes that may be required to enclose receptacles specified hereinafter. E. Outlet boxes for vapor -proof or weatherproof construction shall be cast, having threaded hubs for conduits and shall be galvanized or sherardized. Boxes shall be provided with gaskets under all covers. SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 16050 -4 F. Outlet boxes for installation in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof. G. Provide a blank cover for each outlet not to be provided with a lighting fixture and for each outlet indicated as capped. H. Where surface extensions are installed from existing outlets, furnish and install extension rings as required. 2.6 CABLE AND WIRE A. All cable and wire for power and light shall be installed in conduit or duct except as otherwise specified herein and shall be of type as specified hereinafter unless otherwise shown on Drawings. B. Cable for feeders and service shall be Type THHN/THWN insulated copper. All branch circuit wiring shall be THHN 90 °C. insulated copper. Aluminum cable not acceptable. C. Wire for branch wiring installed in wiring space of fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be Type THHN 90 °C., rated 600 volts. D. All wire shall be pure copper of size noted on Drawings. Copper shall have 98% conductivity. E. Wire, except as otherwise noted, shall not be less than No. 12 AWG, except No. 14 for control and wire of No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Wire smaller than No. 8 AWG shall be solid. F. Stranded wire shall be terminated in solderless compression type lugs. G. Cable connectors shall be T & G Method Color Keyed Compression type units as manufactured by Thomas and Betts Company for No. 8 AWG and larger conductors. For smaller conductors, connectors shall be Ideal Industries, Inc., "Wing Nut" Model 452 or 454, "Scotchlok Brand" insulated, as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company or approved equal, all of type recommended by manufacturer for wire sizes to be connected. Set screw type connectors will be allowed when terminating cable to a circuit breaker. H. Splicing tape shall be Scotch Brand No. 33 or No. 88 plastic electrical tape where required, due to sharp projection of connectors or by Local Code Requirements. Scotch Brand No. 22 rubber electrical tape shall also be applied, both as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, or approved equal. Use Scotch Brand No. 99 tape where excessive heating may occur. 2.7 WALL SWITCHES A. Single pole wall switches shall have capacity of 15 amperes at 277 volts alternating current and shall be Hubbell No. 1201, or approved equal. SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 16050 -5 2.8 WALL RECEPTACLES A. Duplex receptacles for general purpose shall be side wired grounding type with double binding screws, having bakelite bodies and grounding terminals and shall be Hubbell No. 5352 or approved equal. NEMA 5 -20R B. Power receptacles for single phase, 208 volt, shall be single, three -wire plastic body and shall be Hubbell or approved equal with collar or plate fitting snugly around receptacle to close space between same and floor box where used. C. Power receptacles for three - phase, 208 volt or 480 volt, shall be single, four -wire, black composition Hubbell or approved equal. D. Suspended drop cord type receptacles shall be 15A, 125V, three -wire duplex receptacle or four outlet cluster, Hubbell No. 9259, or approved equal. Provide three conductor, grounded, type S.O., heavy duty, 600 volts, drop cord. No. 16 AWG stranded wire insulated with RH rubber compound drop cord of sufficient length to suspend receptacle approximately six feet, 6 inches above finished floor. Length of cord shall not exceed 6' -0 ". E. All receptacles shall be ivory in Office and Sales area. Division 57 electronics back wall shall be gray in color. F. All receptacles shall be specification grade, grounded, Hubbell or approved equal, �., in ratings as shown on Drawings. G. All 120 volt receptacles in P.O.S. room shall be "isolated grounded" type, and also provide isolated grounded type for CRT's, printers, cash registers, employee time clocks and monitor room, regardless of location. IG -5362 NEMA 5 -20R H. All 125 volt single phase, 20 ampere receptacles, where electrical automotive diagnostic equipment, electrical hand tools, and portable lighting devices are used, in auto - center service area and lawnmower shop shall have ground fault circuit - interrupter protection for personnel. NEMA 5 -20R L B. Three -way wall switches shall have a capacity of 15 amperes at 277 volts alternating current and shall be Hubbell No. 1203, or approved equal. C. Where thermal switches are indicated, furnish and install a motor overload switch with proper heating element to protect motor or equipment served. Switches shall be Cutler - Hammer or approved equal with pilot light. D. Where pilot lights are indicated, furnish and install lamp receptacle for installation in outlet box, complete with lamp, plate and ruby jewel. Where pilot lights are associated with wall switches, they shall be in gang with same. E. Dimmer switches shall be Lutron, 1000 watt, minimum. All receptacles in Photo Studio shall be 20 amp, Hubbell or approved equal: duplex receptacle for general purpose shall be Hubbell #5352, surge suppression b" SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -6 duplex receptacle shall be Hubbell #5360S and isolated ground duplex receptacle shall be Hubbell #IG5362. NEMA 5 -20R 2.9 PLATES FOR WALL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES A. Plates for wall switches and receptacles in finished areas shall be smooth thermoplastic nylon, single or in gangs of proper combination as required, Hubbell Series "P" nylon plates. B. Plates for wall switches and wall receptacles in unfinished area shall be sheet steel with rounded corners for installation on outlet boxes, cadmium plates, single or in gang of proper combination as required. C. Plates for wall switches and receptacles installed in cast boxes shall be similar to plates used in unfinished areas except cast. D. Plates in Sales and Office Areas shall match wall finish color. See Owners' project manager for Owners' wall finish schedule. E. Plates in Division 57 electronics backwall shall be gray in color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INDEX: 1. 3.2 Preparation 3. 3.3 Sleeves, Inserts, Expansion Bolts, etc., 5. 3.4 Conduits 6. 3.5 Pullboxes and Junction Boxes 7. 3.6 Outlet Boxes 8. 3.7 Column, Wall and Floor Outlets 9. 3.8 Wiring 11. 3.9 Nameplates and Equipment Designations 13. 3.10 Wall Switches and Receptacles 3.2 PREPARATION A. Obtain all necessary measurements from other Contractors in order that work will fit other branches of work. Verify all measurements at building to the end that work will properly fit. B. Confer with Architect/Engineer's Representative and other Contractors regarding location and size of conduit, equipment, fixtures, duct openings, switches, ceiling, wall and floor outlets, etc. in order that there may be no interferences between the installation or progress of work of any Contractor on the project. C. In the event that work of this Contractor interferes with the work of other Contractors due to the failure of this Contractor to confer with said other SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 2007 16050 -7 NOVEMBER 21, is • Contractors, then this Contractor shall make all necessary changes at his own expense without additional cost whatsoever to Owner. D. In all cases where ducts prevent locating of outlets in ceiling, provide approved strap hangers from structural members for proper support of conduits and boxes beneath ducts, such work being installed after ducts are in place. E. Furnish all tools, apparatus, machines, hoists, staging, etc., necessary for the installation of the work. 3.3 SLEEVES. INSERTS. EXPANSION BOLTS. ETC. A. Lay out and install all work in advance of the pouring of concrete floors and walls. Furnish and install all sleeves required for openings through said floors, walls, etc. Where drawings require conduit to be run exposed, furnish and install all inserts or beam clamps required for supporting said conduits. B. In all cases where ducts prevent location of outlets in ceiling, provide approved strap hangers for proper support of conduit and boxes beneath ducts, such hangers being installed after ducts are in place. C. Sleeves through floor shall be black iron pipe and shall be installed to finish 1" above finished floor line. Sheet metal sleeves will not be accepted. All unused sleeves shall be filled with concrete. All other sleeves shall have fill around conduit for fire proofing. D. Provide malleable inserts for hanging or bracketing all conduits to construction wherever work required under this contract is attached to new concrete work. E. Set inserts during construction of building and set only in locations approved by Architect/Engineer. Inserts for conduit shall be Grinnel No. 282 or approved equal, malleable iron adjustable concrete inserts. F. Where inserts have been improperly located or where it is necessary to support conduits from concrete construction already in place, anchor pipe hangers and supports with expansion bolts by National Lead Company's Paine - Phillips or approved equal expansion bolts. G. For cutting and patching, see Division 1. (01045). 3A CONDUITS A. All overhead conduits on the 1st floor of a 1 story building or the 2nd floor of a 2 story building, shall be run next to the underside of the roof deck, unless there are interferences with other installations. Do not support conduits directly from the metal roof deck. B. All overhead conduits on the 1st floor of a 2 story building, shall be mounted tight to the underside of the structural steel. Maintain approximately 15' -6" clear or as SEARS AT SOUIHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -8 high as the structural steel will allow. This holds true for branch circuit conduits and feeder conduits. SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -9 C. PVC conduit shall be used in concrete slabs on grade. All conduit for branch circuit wiring not imbedded in slabs shall be electric metallic tubing. Service Entrance conduit shall be heavy wall steel unless noted otherwise. D. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be installed exposed in dry locations, in false ceiling spaces and in stud walls, for branch circuit wiring. In upper level concrete floor slabs, not on grade, provide Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) with threaded r... fittings (PVC and EMT not permitted). E. Metal clad cable (type MC): in sizes #12 and #10 may be used in lieu of EMT, only for branch circuiting of lighting fixtures above suspended acoustical ceilings. (With prior written approval of Local Electrical Inspection Department). F. Feeder conduits of all sizes, installed exposed below Second Floor slab shall be electric metallic tubing. G. Size of conduit shall comply with Code Requirements for type of wire and cable used, except that no conduit smaller than 3/4 inch shall be installed in slabs and where larger sizes are indicated on Drawings, larger sizes shall be installed. All home runs in concrete slabs shall be minimum one (1 ") inch. Voice and data conduits shall be minimum (1 ") throughout. H. All conduit shall be reamed after threads are cut, not before. All joints in conduit shall be cut square and shall butt squarely into couplings. Running threads will not be permitted. I. Conduit installed in concrete slabs shall be carefully coordinated with reinforcing steel. Coordinate the entire installation with Contractor installing reinforcing steel. L J. All joints in underground conduit and all conduits run in floor slabs shall be made watertight with pipe sealer. All conduit openings shall be temporarily plugged to exclude water, concrete and plaster. All underground conduits shall be swabbed before conductors are pulled in. Conduits in cinder fills, underground or in slabs under which there is no excavation shall be encased on all sides with a 3" concrete envelope. K. No conduit smaller than ('h ") shall be used unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified herein. Minimum size home run for conduit run exposed or in furred ceiling shall be 3/4 ". L. For conduit 1 -1/4" and larger, hickey bends will not be acceptable. Either manufactured elbows or bends manufactured in bending machine shall be used. All bends shall be long radius. M. Each run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of three (3) quarter bends including those bends located immediately at outlet or fitting. bri lam V N. Where conduit enters a box or other fitting through a knockout, an approved locknut and insulated bushing shall be provided. All conduits for cables larger than No. 6 AWG shall be equipped with T & B, O.Z. Gedney or Appleton Bushings, in addition to locknuts inside and outside at all outlets, pull boxes, cabinets, etc. O. All exposed conduits shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to building column lines. Conduits may be run diagonally over areas with a suspended lay -in ceiling. P. Where vapor -proof or weatherproof wiring is shown on plans, such wiring shall be run in rigid conduit installed exposed or concealed as conditions require. All joints shall be made watertight, using threaded couplings and fittings, with pipe sealer. Branch circuit wiring run exposed to the weather shall be heavy wall steel. For exposed work on walls, conduits shall be supported with galvanized cast one -hole straps and clamp backs and anchors. Where no building members are available, this Contractor must provide suitable angle iron members for support of conduits and outlet boxes. Q. R. For exposed conduits larger than one inch (1 ") where concrete slabs occur, concrete inserts shall be installed in slab and conduit shall be supported by cast pipe rings and threaded round rods. S. Where two or more exposed conduits larger than one inch (1") are run parallel, a trapeze hanger shall be used. Mount conduits as high as possible. T. In concrete or brick construction, insert anchors shall be Ackerman- Johnson, Paine - Phillips or approved equal, with round head machine screws. U. Use an electric drill for drilling holes for all inserts in brick, concrete or similar construction. V. Where conduit is supported to steel members, use standard beam clamps. W. The use of perforated strap iron is prohibited for any work. X. Where fiber insulated bushings are required, conduit shall be threaded to take one locknut on the outside of box, cabinet, etc., and one locknut and fiber bushing on inside of box, cabinet, etc. Y. Do not support conduit or lighting fixtures directly from the metal roof deck. Additional supporting members (i.e. angle iron or unistrut) shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor and supported from the structural steel. Z. Do not support conduit or lighting fixtures directly from sheet metal duct -work or piping. AA. All connection to motors shall be made with minimum 18" and maximum 36" length of sealtight flexible metal conduit. SEARS AT SOU1HCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -10 BB. Primary and secondary connections to transformers shall be made with minimum 18" and maximum 36" length of flexible metal conduit. CC. Conduit Supports: Conduit runs not encased in walls or floor shall be supported at the following intervals: Conduit Size Maximum Distance Between Supports 1/2" to 3/4" 10 feet 1" 12 feet 1 -1/4" and larger 14 feet All EMT (Thinwalls) 10 feet 3.5 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. All exposed pull and junction boxes shall be secured to building or equipment with proper size machine bolts. Secure anchor and hanger rods in an approved manner. B. Pull boxes shall be installed where shown and wherever necessary for each installation of conduits, cables or wires. They shall be of size shown and as required for size and number of conduits, cables and wires to be accommodated as well as for the conditions responsible for installation of same. C. For each low voltage power assistance door pushbutton provide an octagonal J. Box. 3.6 OUTLET BOXES A. In installation of outlet boxes, no shallow ceiling boxes or plates shall be used. Use of handy boxes or similar outlets for exposed work will not be permitted. B. On brick and concrete walls or ceiling, exposed outlets shall be fastened with two Paine - Phillips, Ackerman- Johnson or approved equal, screw anchors and round head machine screws. C. On structural members, exposed outlets shall be fastened using clamps with no less than two machine screws. Where no structural members are available for support of outlet boxes, furnish and install additional steel members as required and in a manner as approved. D. Carefully lay out all outlets and check with Plumbing, Heating and Ventilating and other Contractors so that outlets are not blocked, hidden or rendered inaccessible on account of piping or equipment of these trades passing under, over, across or in close proximity to same, or to cause the devices or fixtures in or on these outlets to be inaccessible for use or maintenance. SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -11 1 tat two r a. ti isr bar 1f E. Outlets and fixtures under fans, ducts, piping, etc., shall be independently supported from the structural steel, so as to provide adequate support for the fixtures. F. Outlet boxes for vapor -proof and/or weatherproof construction shall be installed in a manner to prevent the entrance of moisture into the conduit system. G. Outlet boxes in hazardous areas shall be installed in accordance with Underwriters' Class 1, Division 1 or 2 Requirements. H. Where more than one (1) switch, wall receptacle, etc., occurs at the same location, install multi -gang boxes and plates suitable for the combination of devices required to be accommodated. I. Care must be taken in placing boxes so that fixtures will hang plumb or stand at right angles to wall. 3.7 COLUMN. WALL AND FLOOR OUTLETS A. Floor outlets shall be securely supported as approved by the Architect/Engineer's Representative. Wood stakes driven into ground will not be acceptable. It will be the responsibility of this Contractor to provide supervision when floor slabs containing floor outlets are poured and to take necessary corrective measures in the event a floor outlet is displaced from its proper position. B. Fixturing outlets shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. The fixturing outlets are required around the sales floor, both on interior and exterior walls. C. Fixturing outlets shall be circuited with independent circuits, to be used for the cornice lighting. The cornice lighting will be installed by Owner. D. All receptacle outlets in fixturing walls shall have conduit run above the ceiling, and tied to an outlet in a permanent wall (where practical) or have a separate home run above the ceiling. Fixturing walls shall be built by Owner. Receptacle outlets in fixturing walls shall be installed by this Contractor. E. All telephone, data and T.V. outlets in fixturing walls shall have a 1" conduit with plastic end bushing stubbed 6" above lay -in ceiling. All telephone, data and T.V. outlets in exposed areas shall have a 1" conduit terminated with plastic end bushing at the structural steel. 3.8 WIRING A. Feeders and wiring from main distribution switchboards for power throughout building shall be suitable for three -phase, three or four wire, 480/277 volt, 60 cycle alternating current distribution. SEARS AT SOUI'HCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -12 B. Feeders and wiring for certain general and emergency lighting from main distribution switchboards shall be suitable for three phase, four wire, 277/480 volt, 60 cycle alternating current distribution. Such wiring, in general, serves fluorescent and H.I.D. lighting. C. Feeders and wiring for all other general and emergency lighting as shown from main distribution switchboards to lighting transformers where shown, shall be suitable for three- phase, three wire or single phase, two wire (as shown), 480 volt, 60 cycle alternating current distribution. D. Wiring from dry type transformers to respective panels shall be arranged for operation at the secondary voltage characteristic of the transformer. Such wiring in general serves incandescent lighting, wall and floor outlets, fractional horsepower motors, etc. E. In general, motors of less than % HP shall be suitable for single phase, 120 volt service. All such motors shall be served from lighting system. All motors V2 HP and larger shall be served from power wiring system, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified herein. F. Branch circuits for lighting shall be two, three and four wire as shown and shall be color coded per this specification. G. All lighting shall be distributed between the phases and neutral to balance the load as nearly as possible. Upon completion of work, this Contractor shall submit a tabulation of voltage and ampere values as specified herein -after. H. All conductors comprising a feeder or circuit shall be installed in the same conduit or as noted on Drawings. I. All conduits buried in soil shall be provided with a concrete enclosure not less than 3" thick. All conduits in slabs under which there is an excavation shall have at least 3" concrete under same. J. Where conduits are installed exposed, they shall be run at right angles to or parallel with adjacent construction. They shall be supported from structural members of building construction by clamps or other suitable devices and from masonry by expansion bolts or sleeves and straps. In the absence of structural members, this Contractor shall furnish and install steel angles, etc., as required for support of conduit and equipment. K. Where vapor -proof or weatherproof wiring is indicated on Drawings, conduit system shall be made watertight, using gaskets at outlets as required. L. Where hazardous locations are noted on Drawings, wiring and devices shall be explosion - proof. All electrical work within and affected by hazardous classification area shall be in accordance with all applicable codes. SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -13 M. All conductors installed underground or in conduits in slabs under which there is no excavation shall be insulated with moisture resisting insulation approved for installation in permanent moist locations. N. Upon final completion of work, all temporary wiring shall be removed. No capped outlets will be permitted. O. Except as otherwise noted, all neutral conductors shall be of the same cross - sectional area as phase conductors. P. All lighting and receptacle homeruns 125 feet and greater shall have #10 wire for the homerun. This shall apply to 277 volt and 120 volt wiring. Q. Color Coding: 1. All conductors shall be color coded of the following colors and markers: For 120/208V A Phase - Black B Phase - Red C Phase - Blue Neutral - White For 277/480V A Phase - Brown B Phase - Orange C Phase - Yellow Neutral - Gray 2. For wire sizes which are available in black only or in a limited color range, the above specified color code shall be accomplished by application of colored tape applied to the visible portion of wires in junction boxes, pull boxes, panelboards, switchboards, etc. Tape shall be as manufactured by 3M Company, and wire markers shall be as manufactured by Brady. 3. Green shall be used only for grounding wire to meet National Electric Code requirements. 4. Color as selected for the purpose of identifying circuits shall be applied to insulation. Colors must be fast, fadeless and capable of withstanding cleaning in the event that insulation becomes soiled. 5. Color codes shall be consistent in all control circuits with no splicing of two or more colors within any single lead. 6. All systems of control circuits involving more than five wires shall have each end of every wire, whether it connects to terminals, coils, switches, etc., labeled with the given wire number with Brady or equivalent, gummed tape labels either pre - printed or typewritten. In the event that more than one wire of the same number leaves a common terminal or terminal bar, the "home run" is to carry the given wire number (which is to be closest to the termination of wire), a symbol or indication of the component it is connected to, leaving about 1/2" to 1" gap between these numbers. 7. Identify neutrals in Junction Boxes where more than one neutral is used. SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -14 3.9 NAMEPLATES AND EQUIPMENT- DESIGNATIONS A. In addition to nameplates specified elsewhere herein, furnish and install red or black finish engraved white core laminated micarta nameplates for all panelboards, motor starters, disconnect switches, transformers, safety switches, time switches, magnetic contactors, relays, etc., furnished under this Contract. B. Others will furnish nameplates to this Contractor for equipment furnished under their particular branch of work. This Contractor shall install all such nameplates on equipment for which such nameplates are intended. C. Nameplate designations shall be as later directed by Owner's Superintendent. D. Provide stick -on voltage name tags on all 480 volt and 277/480 volt equipment. 1. On all 480 volt starters, on outside covers (remote from M.C.C.) 2. On all 480 volt disconnect switches, on outside covers. 3. On all 277 -480 volt panels (on inside of door for recessed panels). 4. On timers, relays, contactors, etc. E. Provide screw -on name tags on all motor starters giving pump or fan number designation and on timers, relays and contactors indicating their function. F. All lettering of voltage and motor number designations shall be minimum % inch high. 3.10 WALL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES A. Wall switches shall be located as indicated on Drawings, arranged single or in gangs, at height 4' -0" centerline, or otherwise indicated on drawings, and shall have approved plates and furnish as specified hereinafter. B. Where two or more phases of a 277 volt system enter a single switch box, metal barrier plates shall be used to separate the phases in the switch box. C. Mounting height of receptacles shall be 15" to bottom above floor unless otherwise indicated. SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) END OF SECTION 16050 6. low bur Ile low BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21, .� 2007 16050 -15 to SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 11 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of Lighting Fixtures. 2. Installation of Lighting Controls. 3. Retrofit of existing lighting fixtures B. Related Sections: 1. General, Special and Supplementary Conditions. 2. Division 1, Specification Sections. 3. 16050 - Basic Materials & Methods. C. Products furnished and installed by this Contractor. 1. New Lighting Fixtures: a. General lighting fixtures and exit signs. 2. Incandescent, fluorescent and H.I.D. lamps. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the General and Special Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Lighting fixtures furnished by this Contractor. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lighting fixtures shall be in compliance with the following applicable standards: 1. NEC 2. UL 3. NEMA 4. IESNA L4 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All lighting fixtures and lamps shall be stored in one area. Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor to establish this storage area in the best possible location. Conditions and procedures during storage shall be as follows: 1. Contractor shall provide all required equipment, etc., necessary to maintain all lighting fixtures and lamps in a dry location and maintain the equipment in good condition during the storage period. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) LIGHTING 16500 -1 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 B. All lighting fixture accessories, mounting materials and whips shall be provided by this Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Install all lighting fixtures shown on the Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall provide metal channel for all fixtures which require 1- 1/2" metal channel for support. 2. Provide "caddy" or equal t -bar safety clips for all lighting fixtures in lay -in ceilings, per N.E.C. 410 -16C. Each four (4) foot fixture shall have four (4) clips; each two (2) foot fixture shall have two (2) clips. In addition, all lighting fixtures in hurricane or earthquake regions shall have additional supports per local code requirements, but in no case less than two wire supports at opposite corners connected to structural steel. 3. Special Mounting: When mounting fixtures to drywall or acoustical ceilings, provide and install mounting angles and secure fixtures all in accordance with manufacturers' standard details. When mounting surface and pendant type fixtures to drywall or acoustical tile, they shall be secured as per manufacturers' standard details. Should recessed fixtures occur in drywall ceilings, special mounting detail will be furnished by Engineer, if required. When locating outlets in suspended grid ceilings, consult and cooperate with Division 9 requirements to assure correct placement of fixtures in the grid. 4. Plaster Rings: When recessed fixtures require plaster frame or ring, Contractor shall deliver them to General Contractor three (3) days prior to installation. All fixtures requiring plaster frames or rings will be furnished with fixtures supplied by this Contractor. 5. Lamps: All lamps will be furnished by this Contractor in separate lamp cartons. B. Contractor shall be responsible for the replacing of all defective fluorescent and H.I.D. fixture ballasts during construction period. Make all arrangements directly with ballast manufacturer. Ballast manufacturer will replace ballasts and compensate Contractor for labor costs. See Manufacturer's guarantee for further details. C. Plenum Ceilings: 1. All equipment and work in plenum ceilings shall be approved for use in plenum ceilings. 2. All work in plenum ceilings shall conform to local codes. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) LIGHTING 16500 -2 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 Where noted on the drawing "RX" or "RXR", contractor shall.refer to plan notes for scope of work 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING CONTROLS A. This Contractor shall provide time clocks for control of mall Sears sign and exterior light boxes - refer to drawings for product requirements. B. Refer to "Panel Schedules" on the drawings, for branch circuits controlled by time clocks. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) END OF SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500 -3 NOVEMBER 19, 2007 SECTION 16600 - SPECIAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Emergency lighting and exit signs. 2. Exterior signs. 3. Sound and paging system. NIC 4. Telephone service. NIC 5. Cash register system/Telephone system. NIC 6. Fire Alarm and Security Alarm System. 7. Antenna System Bases. NIC 8. Display Wiring. NIC 9. Miscellaneous Equipment. 10 CCTV system. NIC B. Related Sections: 1. General, Special and Supplementary Conditions. 2. Division 1, Specification Sections. 3. 16050 - Basic Materials & Methods. C. Products Installed by this Contractor, but furnished by Owner. 1. Television and radio demonstration system: (NIC) a. Antenna tower. b. All radio antenna equipment. L2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to Owners General and Special Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Exit signs. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment shall be in compliance with the following applicable standards: 1. NEC 2. UL 3. EIA 4. NEMA SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16600 -1 NOVEMBER 21, 2007 1 A PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Assign one man the complete responsibility for receiving, storage and distribution of all items furnished by Owner to the Contractor. This man shall maintain a continuous inventory of all equipment, including number required, received and installed; also he shall control the receiving operation so that equipment will not be lost, stolen or misplaced. B. Keep Owners' Project Manager informed so that all items can be delivered to job site when required. C. Contractor shall be totally responsible for protection and condition of all items furnished to him by Owner from the time of receipt until the work is accepted by Owner. All damaged and/or missing items not noted at time of receipt, but found at the time of installation shall be replaced and repaired by Contractor at his expense. 1.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT SIGNS A. Furnish and install an emergency wiring system as detailed on Drawings, including circuit wiring, outlets and connection to the various lights. B. List of equipment on Emergency System: 1. All emergency lighting. 2. All emergency exit signs. C. Directional arrows and color of exit signs will meet the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.6 MALL ENTRY SIGNS A. Signs will be furnished and installed by Owner, and this Contractor shall provide all branch circuit wiring, conduit and controls relative thereto. Sign wiring shall be 120 volt. This Contractor shall provide a junction box with the appropriate number of circuits as indicated on drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOUND AND PAGING SYSTEM (NIC) A. This contractor shall provide, unless otherwise indicated, new speakers to match existing as indicated on plan drawings PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 The Contractor shall install new exit signs and new emergency lights as indicated on drawings. SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16600 -2 3.2 SOUND AND PAGING SYSTEM FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR (NIC) A. New speakers, volume controls and wiring are indicated on lighting plans to march existing. 33 TELEPHONE SERVICE (EXISTING) (NIC) A. Telephone Service, existing run overhead to POS room, See power plans for location. B. Provide a 4' x 8' x 3/4" plywood panel at telephone terminal location indicated on plans. The telephone terminal location shall be provided with a ground connection as specified herein and a duplex wall receptacle. The Main Telephone/Cash Register Equipment Room shall be as detailed on the Drawings. C. Install a fish wire in all new telephone conduits. D. Handicap outlets shall be located so that top of phone is maximum 3' -8" above floor, or per local code. E. Arrange and co- ordinate all work with the local telephone company regarding telephone service to the building (100 pair cable).. 3A CASH REGISTER/TELEPHONE SYSTEM (NIC) A. All 120 volt circuits to remote cash/registers; CRT's; printers and processors shall have circuit breaker handles locked in the "ON" position. All of these circuits shall be dedicated to these devices and shall be 2 wire circuits (hot and neutral), with isolated ground receptacles. Provide a green ground conductor for all isolated ground receptacles. B. Owner will furnish and install all telephone instruments; CRT's; printers; processors and cash registers. C. Owner will furnish and this contractor shall install all of the following: 1. Telephone cables (voice). 2. Data cables. 3. Cable terminations and connectors at both ends. 4. Cover - plates for wall outlets and floor pedestals. 5. Grounding of overhead cable racks. D. Contractor shall provide the empty raceway system for the tele/data cables. Furnish a single or 2 gang outlet box in walls as indicated on drawings with 1" empty conduit, stubbed above lay -in ceilings. Furnish floor boxes with 1" empty conduit. Run over to columns and stub -up with 1" empty conduit or as indicated on drawings. 3.5 FIRE ALARM AND SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM (EXISTING) SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS NOVEMBER 21, 2007 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16600 -3 r 6 A. Provide 120 volt circuit to bridge exterior doors and to mall entrance doors. B. For additional information, see Section 16720 "Fire Alarm and Security Alarm Specifications" and associated fire alarm system drawings. 3_6 ANTENNA SYSTEMS BASES (EXISTING) (NIC) A. Contractor shall provide the following antenna weatherproof service heads on the roof as per drawings. 1. The weatherproof service head for Master TV/FM Antenna, DSS Dish and TV dish network located as close as possible to the center of the building and to the store electronic shop. B. For each antenna weatherproof service head, provide fish wiring as per drawings. C. Provide grounding for the antenna base back to the main switchboard. Install as shown on drawings by means of ground clamps, Killark type "CCSC ", or equal, if necessary pipe connections. Ground shall have a resistance of not more than 25 ohms. D. All antenna and cabling are provided by others. E. Provide TV floor outlets as per Section 16050 Paragraph 2.12B and provide T.V. wall outlets that shall have ivory cable outlet plate Leviton #86013. Provide empty (1") conduit with fish wire for up to three T.V. floor outlets and thru the nearest column or permanent wall up to the space 6" above the lay -in ceiling. Provide 120 volt, 20 amp double duplex receptacle next to the amplifier. 33 DISPLAY WIRING (NIC) A. Extension of wiring beyond wall, column and floor outlets is a part of this Contract. See General Conditions. 3.8 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Certain equipment, such as sliding door at Customer Pick -up, baler and compactor, will be furnished and installed by others. Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit, wire and disconnect devices and make all final line side connections in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 32. CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEMS (NIC) A. All closed circuit TV equipment and wiring will be furnished and installed by Owner. B. Contractor shall provide dedicated circuits as shown on drawings. C. For each exterior camera installed at the back of a parapet, the General Contractor will provide supporting material for camera and this Contractor shall provide a sleeve through the roof, with a weatherhead. (Existing) SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) SPECIAL SYSTEMS 166004 NOVEMBER 21, 2007 END OF SECTION 16600 SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16600 -5 NOVEMBER 21, 2007 mos Imo M 1 R 0 Denver Fort Collins Summit County Civil Engineering Structural Engineering Retail Architecture December 11, 2007 Mr. Bill Buterbaugh City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, WA 98188 RE: Sears — 400 Southcenter Mall Tukwila, Washington New Second Level Exterior and Mall Entries Reply to Letter of Incomplete Application #1 Electrical Permit Application E07 -715 S. A. Miro Job No. 07164 Dear Mr. Buterbaugh: See reply below in response to the following comment: Let us know if you have any questions in this regard. Sincerely, S. A. MIR', INC. Milton J. Lanser, P.E. Vice President INCOMPLETE "1. Provide panel schedules showing new circuits and loads (rolling grill, etc.)" Reply: Three sets of added sheet ME -2 have been provided. This sheet has panel schedules for the panels receiving new circuits. New circuits are noted in bold text for your convenience. mji (x: /Jobs2007 /07- 164 /00 /Corres /Itr017 -Bill Buterbaugh — Tukwila Bldg -Elect Dept- 121107) E1-07- 715 RECEIVER DEC 14 2007 PERMIT CENTEI S. A. MIRO, INC. 4582 South Ulster Street Suite 1501 Denver, Colorado 80237 www.samiro.com Tel 303-741-3737 FAX 303 - 694 -3134 November 29, 2007 Milton Lanser 4582 S Ulster St, Ste 1501 Denver CO 80237 Dear Mr. Lanser, City of Tukwila Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director RE: Letter of Incomplete Application # 1 Electrical Permit Application EL07 -715 Sears — 400 Southcenter Mall Steven M Mullet, Mayor This letter is to inform you that your permit application received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center on November 27, 2007 is determined to be incomplete. Before your application can continue the plan review process the following item from the following department needs to be addressed: Building Department: Bill Buterbaugh, at 206 973 -4758, if you have any questions concerning the following comments. 1. Provide panel schedules showing new circuits and loads (rolling grill, etc.) Please address the comment above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that three (3) sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at the Permit Center at (206) 431 -3670. Sincerely, er Marshall P t Technician Enclosures File: EL07 -715 P:\Permit Center\Incomplete Letters \2007\EL07 - 715 Incomplete Ltr #1.DOC jem 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 DEPARTMENT : B I g isio PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: EL07 -715 DATE: 04 -10 -08 PROJECT NAME: SEARS SITE ADDRESS: 400 SOUTHCENTER MALL Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # X Revision # 1 After Permit Issued Fire Prevention Public Works ❑ Structural ❑ Permit Coordinator ❑ DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Incomplete Planning Division DUE DATE: 04 -1 5-08 Not Applicable Comments: C Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS R CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 05 -13 -08 Approved Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) E Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Documents/rouling slip.doc 2-28-02 ACTIVITY NUMBER: EL07 -715 DATE: 12 -14 -07 PROJECT NAME: SEARS SITE ADDRESS: 400 SOUTHCENTER MALL Original Plan Submittal X Response to Incomplete Letter # 1 Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: �i7b Buling ID vision Public Works 'rERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 12 -18 -07 Complete Fire Prevention Incomplete Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Documents/routing slip.doc 2- 28-02 Structural Review Required APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions C Structural ❑ Permit Coordinator X Planning Division Not Applicable ❑ No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE: 01 -15 -08 Not Approved (attach comments) n Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: ACTIVITY NUMBER: EL07 -715 DATE: 11 -27 -07 PROJECT NAME: SEARS SITE ADDRESS: 400 SOUTHCENTER MALL X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: 144 PI Bu ng Dlvi ion Public Works n Comments: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 � PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP Fire Prevention Structural DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete ❑ Incomplete TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route ❑ Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator DUE DATE: 11-29-07 Not Applicable 1 Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: / I1' LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ►'4 Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: : 51Ind No further Review Required DATE: DATE: n DUE DATE: 12-27-07 Approved n Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments) N otation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS 1 1 -1-10-0i' t S-1E -o ff/ Ott Summary of Revision: 1.4 1: ( - i faG „‘ 4w a ,4„ ,(c. rdo w, .s a .1.4 a4,t e At s kl € < art t h Received by: IA,,/th REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: PROJECT NAME: S-ea+- SITE ADDRESS: 1 1,60 Soot te, t ( REVISION LOG PERMIT NO: "`" E 1-0 l-1 1 C ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE: 1-3-9--C) $ (please print) (please print) (please print) (please print) (please print) REVISION SUBMITTAL 1 Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit ('enter. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fiLY. e'/e. Date: „2/ �OtQ ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ❑ Response to Correction Letter # • Revision # .1 alter Permit is issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Lxaminer Project Name: Sears Project Address: 400 Southcenter Mall 1.1!s :.nn -. t ; i „■u li!r: rr.i -.! City' of Tukwila Department of ( Development 43o0 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 1 Un 1 ukw ila. Washington Phone: 2b u-431-3o70 20(- 431- 3c,r,5 «'eh site: Imp: www.c•l.nt /cwil,r.►r,r.rr.r Plan ('heckPerntit Number: EL07 -715 .1 /eit 'r .)ri'l'i' /.1111,triti'/'. Pilt. 1 'i' Contact Person: Milt Lanser Phone Number: (303) 741 -3737 x 285 Summary of Revision: Modify drawing at area around new exterior entry where one stock room was added to the left of the entry and the stock room on the other side now remains. On sheet ME.1 modify lighting plan for two stock areas and adjacent sales area and also provide electrical power for three cash register stations to be added on second level reference plan H. on sheet ME.2 add circuit for cash register power. Revisions have been clouded. RECEIVED CRY OF TUKWIIA APR 1 o 2008 PER Sheet Number(s): ME.1, ME.2 "Cloud” or highlight all areas of revision including date of revi 'o C Received at the City of l uku ila l'ernu Center enter by: N►�'.Iltered in Permits Plus on "l4)--O/k Date ' 1117_40 Project Name: Sears City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 1 REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. • Response to Incomplete Letter # 1 ❑ Response to Correction Letter # - ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Address: 400 Southcenter Mall Contact Person: m ALT LA-N.5 EI- Phone Number:C 141-3777 k29S Summary of Revision: !4 A D S ' N f ' O " i n 6-2- W I T C E : m . 1 4 , PI - Oa. or Sheet Number(s): 111E -2, ( EN - n1' S 400 ) "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision V -1 : 1 /t^i` Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: Entered in Permits Plus on 1.d= U \applications\forms- applications on Iine\revision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 Revised: Plan Check/Permit Number: EL07 -715 Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Steve Lancaster, Director e36CENED EWOF TUKWILA DEC 1[lt • ERM1T CENTER License Information License SEATAEI077RW Licensee Name SEA TAC ELECTRIC INC Licensee Type ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR UBI 601510212 Ind. Ins. Account Id PRESIDENT Business Type CORPORATION Address 1 7056 S 220TH ST Address 2 City KENT County KING State WA Zip 98032 Phone 2538725553 Status ACTIVE Specialty 1 GENERAL Specialty 2 UNUSED Effective Date 12/16/1993 Expiration Date 12/16/2009 Suspend Date Separation Date Parent Company Previous License SEATAEC131QC Next License Associated License HARGRT *974CD Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date HARGREAVES, TOM AGENT 12/17/1993 HARGREAVES, TOM PRESIDENT 12/17/1993 HARGREAVES, Look Up a Contractor, Electrician or Plumber License Detail Page 1 of 2 Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Electrical Contractor A business licensed by L &I to contract electrical work within the scope of its specialty. Electrical Contractors must maintain a surety bond or assignment of savings account. They also must have a designated Electrical Administrator or Master Electrician who is a member of the firm or a full -time supervisory employee. Master Electrician Information License Name Status HARGRT *974CD HARGREAVES, TOM ACTIVE https: // fortress. wa. gov /lni/bbip /printer.aspx ?License= SEATAEI077RW 03/28/2008 1 APPROVED PI err q n !fl rr rr r n�rl� r ,., 7 77 n iA NOTED, MODIFIED CR AD E WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION FROM THE BUILDING ommmC:A1_, ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH TI 1E APPROVED PLANS AN i5 .a23. -::CT TO FIELD INSPECTIOPIa 1. REMOVE (13) FLUORESCENT 1X4 WALL WASHERS. (SIC) 2. RE- INSTALL (5) FLUORESCENT 1X4 WALL WASHERS. (SIC) 3. TURN THE REMAINING (8) FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS OVER TO THE SEARS PROJECT MANAGER (SIC) 4. REMOVE (5) 4 FOOT SINGLE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURES (SIC). 5. RE- INSTALL (4) 4 FOOT SINGLE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURES (SIC). 6. TURN THE REMAINING (1) 4 FOOT SINGLE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURES OVER TO THE SEARS PROJECT MANAGER (SIC). 7. REMOVE TWO RETURN AIR REGISTERS AS PART OF DEMOLITION PREPARATION FOR NEW STOCK ROOM AND TURN OVER TO SEARS PROJECT MANAGER (SIC). A � EXTERIOR ENTRY MECHANICAL /LIGHTING . v . 1 E.1 DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'- GT mA 1111 ■ ■■ •1111 1111 ■■ •••• ■ ■ ■ •••• •••••■• ■■■■■E■ •••••=■ MEESEME EMENEME ■ ■■WIIM3 ■I■■■ = •■••11■ ■11■. E M■■■■-■-•i ■■ ADA POWER OPERATED DOOR 120 VOLTS, 5 AMPS (MEC) EXTERIOR ENTRY ELECTRICAL POWER NEW P LAN SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'- C o RF - op - FIRST /GROUND LEVEL ELECTRICAL PLAN 2 #12, 1-#12G 3/4 "C. (1) SPARE 20A.1 P.0 /B.IN LP- 2LIAA, CCT.27 ELECT' ROOM 2A (MEC) EA FIRST SCALE: 1/16" = 1' 77 LEVE!4 IFF SER EMERGEN LIGHTING COTS. 4, X W LAY - I N CEILING M E T x EMI 31 NEW 12" ROUND 3-WAY BLOW CEILING DIFFUSER 500 OEM; MAKE NEW CONNECTION (2) ELECTRICAL TO BOTTOM OF E (STING SUPPLY DUCT WITH I HEATERS (SEE N EW 12 NOUN -N ,. = IiC;T (SICK (sic) T 5 C, EM31 1. RELOCATE (5) FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS - EXTEND EXISTING CIRCUIT AS INDICATED. (SIC) 2. ADD (4) NEW 2X2 RECESSED TYPE 'A' FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES; 9 CELL; 3' PARABOLIC; 3 LAMP MATCH EXISTING; 120 VOLT; BLACK REVEAL (SIC) 3. ADD (1) NEW EXIT SIGN TO MATCH EXISTING - WIRE TO CONSTANT SECTION IN PANEL EM -1 (120 VOLTS) ARE ON THE SWITCHED SECTION IN PANEL EM - (120 VOLTS). (SIC) 4. ADD (2) NEW TYPE 'C' LIGHTING FIXTURES - EXTERIOR BESIDE BRIDGE DOORS; WINONA LIGHTING CAT. # 5740 WL - 33 - 120 OA - CPF; (BONE WHITE CUSTOM PAINT FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT FINISH)(MEC) 5. PROVIDE (2) NEW COMMERCIAL CEILING HEATERS - MARKEL #F3482 -T -S - 2.0 KW, 208 VOLTS, SINGLE CEILING HEATERS WITH BUILT IN THERMOSTAT AND DISCONNECT SWITCH; WHITE POWDER COAT FINISH. (SIC) 6 - VERIFY AND PROVIDE AS REQUIRED - EMERGENCY LIGHTING PER IBC 2006 FROM NEW EXTERIOR DOORS TO OF EGRESS ALONG MEANS OF EGRESS PATHWAY (SIC). NEW MECHANICAL /LIGHTING PLAN AT EXTERIOR ENTRY SCALE: 1/8" = 1' ■ ■ ■ ■Ium■■11■11 ■11 ■ ■11■■■■■■■oI 111 11 11111111111111111E ■ ■■■n Numminnimmonmuunmem Nummmummonommutimi ■�_ ■ ■ ■� ■ ■� _■■■ ■■■■■■ ■ ■ ■■■■I■m ■ INN ■■ 1111■■ 1111■■■■■ �N■ MA I ■� ■ ■ ■•1111■■11 11■ ■ ■11 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■11■ ■II■ ■ ■■I■ ■1111111111111111111111111 ■111111 ■ � ■■■■ 11■il •IA 1111\: f..1' � y.y M1! •_1111■ i i LA 1 r oe 3#12, 1#120, 3 /4 "C. TO (2) SPARE 20A.1P.C/B'S PANEL 2LC; CCTS. 32,34 PROVIDE NEW TWO CIRCUIT TIME CLOCK 120 VO � S, 24HR /7DAY WITH ASTRONOMICAL [�71AL. STORE OPENING TO STORE LOSING CONTROLS TO ELECT ICAL BOON 2C (vIEC) J.B. ABOVE, LAY -IN CEILING (TYP. FOR 5) (MEC) SEARS SIGN FURNISHED CONTRACTOR (MEC) ELECTRICAL ROOM 1B r AND INSTALLED BY SIGN NEW MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN vfirA C, EM31 I I IMg iOIIIIuIIIII .............. CONTRACTOR. ALL WIRING 29 29 29 SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAW NGS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS MOUNT PHOTO -CELL 6" A30VE I STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC KEY OPERATED RAISE LOWER SWITCH PROVIDED WITH MOTORIZED GATE MOUNT 42" +/- AFF (MEC) SCALE: 1/8" = BY ELECTRICAL C� 0 LIGHT BOX: 72 "X72 "X6 -3/4" 605 WATTS, 120 VOLTS (TYPICAL FOR 3) (MEC) 2® HOMERUN: 2 - #10, 1 - #10G 3/4 "C SPARE 20A.1P.C/B IN PANEL 1LB (ELECTRICAL ROOM 1B), CCT. 29. TIME CLOCK 120v, 24 -HR, 7 -DAY WITH ASTRONOMICAL DIAL STORE OPENING TO STORE CLOSING (MEC) BIAX 24" LONG TO EMERGENCY LIGHTS PHASE, RECESSED EXISTING MEANS PROVIDE MCCEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT 2#12, 1#12, G 1/2"C. THROUGH HOLE IN "EXTERIOR" WALL AND BACK ABOVE LAY -IN CEILING (TYP. FOR 5). NOTE: EXACT LOCATION OF ROUGH -IN POINT IS CRITICAL AT SIGN N COORDINATE CLOSELY WITH SIGN SUPPLIER (MEC) 4' -0" HIGH SEARS SIGN 120 VOLTS r- SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION 2#12, 1#12G, 3/4 "C. (1) SPARE 20A.1 P.0 /B. PANEL 2LCC, CCT.15 (MEC) 1 /2HP 120 VOLTS MOTORIZED GATE. FLA =8.2 (MEC) LIGHTIN POWE IT L X X DEMOLITION SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION X EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO REMAIN XRR EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED, RELOCATED AND JUNCTION BOX REMOVED OR CAPPED XR EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET RELOCATED (NEW LOCATION) R EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED XC EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED AND JUNCTION BOX CAPPED AS REQUIRED XO NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OVER EXISTING OUTLET XA EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE ABANDONED XM EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE MODIFIED AS REQUIRED X R ° XRR I — I I 7 L.1 L .J 1. REMOVE AND RELOCATE (5) 2X2 RECESSED FLUURESCENT FIXTURES. (MEC) 2. REMOVE (7) 1X4 RECESSED FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS AND TURN OVER TO SEARS PROJECT MANAGER. (MEC) r .... .........rr..:......:. 240" I 49 MM ,,,,,, 11111111 .....r MEW Mr • J A Tr • '1 • .I wMI 117 Arrrrrrrrrrl• A.M ■MMr ■ ■MPT 2 -#10, 1-#10, G 3/ (1) 20A, 1P, C -B- 2LLC:23 (SIC) N OTE: NEW VO I AND DATA CAB FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS OMm MMMIImMMM ... .MM M.M.MMEM ...u..MM =MOM L. P_MMMMMMM A.rrrr.M IMMAMMMMM .MMMMMMM ..MMIIMMM I. uiMM...1.11 1 C: ∎JI :II ': • ■' :AMrl:. \M'. Mr 1M! ME 1M ■MM■ I'C.•lR .I. 14IJM..I: 1n.. MI I IBM I r A A- m * 1 t�•:l•;Iu.1. Ir�.MMLI L I - I:IMM 1 WRIT , • 9L7> �7MM! J! iEiLJI' 1I1M M Mmsmemw rrrrrrMMMMMMMM.Mw.LT.k$: r1:Ir1.JMMRI..dL:L %A] a AMMM i■■ SCAM MMMM M M MMMMMMMMErrrMMMM MMMM MMM rMMMMMM MM MMAMMMMMMMMMMEMMMMMMMMMMMMMMI. MMMMMM■orir= . MMMM MMMMMnM MMMMMM MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMrMM.Mmossi MMrrrrrrrM MM Mrrrrrrrrrrrr.rrrrrommmagrrrir ■ m �nrnm�l. Mr- M MM ■ ■ M MI M IUMI:M..WRI 7: r M� _ -- ; I MMMMMMM MMMM....... MMMMMMMMMMMM■ MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM /MEMMMMMMMMMMMIMEMMAI•! h lII.ii MEMOMM COMB. POWE POKE -THRU MATCH BUILDI (TYPICAL FOR CONTRACTOR XTEND CON ASH WRAP DOUBLE CAS LOCATION AN ONLY ONE F THIS LOCATIO LOW VOLTAGE OOR BOX: STANDARD ) OR TION TO IT THROUr BINET AT REGISTER PROVIDE R BOX AT (SIC). MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMrr•rr •MMl -k�; MMMMMMM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■ 0 133 At 1P I I I 1 E LECTRICAL � _�oonn fi NEW 10 109 4 / / / /- / / - - 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / ( .I RroR 0� Aj LIM ARS 141D - t 1 it C H SECOND LEVEL NEW ENTRIES ELECTRICAL ME.1 REFERENCE PLAN SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0" � ELECTRICA ROO MMMMMM MMMMM MM X 1. INSTALL (5) EXISTING RELOCATED (XR) 2X2 RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURES. (MEC) 2. PROVIDE (7) NEW TYPE 'B' MALL ENTRANCE FIXTURES. TYPE 'B' FIXTURE IS HALO RECESSED DOWNLIGHT, 8" APERTURE, (2) LAMP 26 WATT DTT, CATALOG NO H787HP -9870C CLEAR SPECULAR REFLECTOR, 120 VOLTS, HIGH POWER FACTOR BALLAST, 6 5/8" HIGH X 8 3/16" (MEC) REVISIONS No changes shall be made to the scope of work without prior approval of Tukwila Building Division. NOTE: Revisions will require a new plan submittal and may include additional plan review fees. MMM CONNECT TO EXISTING FLUORESCENT WALL -WASH CIRCUITS (MEC) INSTALL I N MALL SOFFIT COORDINATE WITH NALL CONTRACTOR (MEC) 7 FILE Permit No Plar review approval is subi Approval of construction e violation of any added of approved Field Copy and By Date: mow ....; . "to* .11 LIGHTING POWER (MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR '(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR City of , uhvila sur r)3 G DIV/SION REVIEWED FO CODE COMPLIA NFPA70 °NE MAY - 2588 �f Tukwil BUILDING DIVI Public Works, Building PERMIT NUMB 07. 7 REVISION NOj RECEIVED APR 102 III I PERMIT CENTER Date TAC EIATV115 SITE COPY reqwer u 'A A 9407 REGISTERED ARCHITECT ROBE S. CHAFEE JR STATE OF WASHINGTON Project Consultant: Project Architect: Robert Chafee S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741-3737 to errors and omissk ns. does not authorize code or =Ma . Matt acknowledged: vision 3 2 1 Issue: 10/28/2008 01/16/2008 INTERIOR ALTERATIONS 11/19/2007 11/07/2007 Date: Scale: AS NOTED Date: 11-01-2007 Design: MJL Drown: KJW CADD File: ME.1 Sheet Number: PERMIT REVISIo PRICING /PERMIT REVIEW Description: M E.1 Panel 2LA 1 1 20 3 1 20 5 1 20 7 1 20 9 1 20 11 1 20 13 1 20 15 1 20 17 1 20 19 1 20 21 1 20 23 1 20 25 1 20 27 1 20 29 1 20 31 1 20 33 1 20 35 1 20 37 1 20 39 1 20 41 120/208 volts 200 amps 1 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse) 3 phase / c P T k 0 r t 1 i # e p LOCATION KVA Track Lighting Track Lighting Track Lighting Track Lighting Track Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Stock Room Lights General Lighting Janitor Room Receptacle Exterior Entry Lighting Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Blank Space 0.14 KVA LOCATION Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m West & Ctr Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting .. West & Ctr Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) Spare Spare Stock Room Lighting Stock Room Lighting Stock Room Lighting Stock Room Lighting Spare Spare Blank Space Electrical Room 2A T P c r 0 k i 1 t p e # 20 1 2 20 1 4 20 1 6 20 1 8 20 1 10 20 1 12 20 1 14 20 1 16 20 1 18 20 1 20 20 1 22 20 1 24 20 1 26 20 1 28 20 1 30 20 1 32 20 1 34 20 1 36 20 1 38 20 1 40 42 37 39 1 1 20 20 120/208 volts } 100 amps 1 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse) 3 phase/ 4 wire Panel 2LAA T k 0 r t 1 i # e p 1 1 20 3 1 20 5 1 20 7 1 20 9 1 20 11 1 20 13 1 20 15 1 20 17 1 20 19 1 20 21 1 20 23 1 20 25 1 20 27 1 20 29 1 20 31 1 20 33 1 20 35 1 20 41 LOCATION Spare Column Receptacles - Southwest Column Receptacles - Southwest Spare Spare Spare Spare S pare Spare Column Receptacles - Southwest Column Receptacles - Southwest Column Receptacles - Southwest Spare Exterior Entry - Power Assist Door S pare Spare S pare Spare Spare Circuit Column GG9 Spare Circuit Column GG9 Blank Space KVA KVA 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 LOCATION POS System Receptacles POS System Receptacles Sales Receptacles m Idea Center POS System Receptacles Column Receptacles - Southwest Column Receptacles - Southwest Receptacle - Passenger Elev - South Spare Column Receptacles m SW Storage Column Receptacles - SW Storage Column Receptacles - SW Storage Batt Pack /Lighting - North Escalator Blank Space Spare Spare Blank Space Blank Space Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater E Iectrical Room 2A a 1 1 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 15 15 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 G k t # 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 Panel ILB-2 c k t # 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 120/208 volts 100 amps 1 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse) 3 phase 1 4 wire LOCATION Light Boxes - Shoe Department Light Boxes - Shoe Department Exterior Light Boxes Blank Space Stock Room Lighting Blank Space Office & Hall Lighting Restroom Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m Sales Blank Space Spare KVA KVA 1.82 LOCATION Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m Center Blank Space Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Blank Space Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Track Lighting Spare Spare Blank Space Electrical Room 1B T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 20 20 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c k t 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 Panel 2LC c k t 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 120/208 volts 200 amps 1 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse) 3 phase 14 wire LOCATION Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Spare Track Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Track Lighting Spare Track Lighting Spare Track Lighting Spare Stock Lighting Spare Neon Lighting Spare KVA KVA 1.20 1.20 LOCATION Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting .. West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting w West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m East Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Spare Mali Entry Sign Mall Entry Sign Spare Neon Lighting - Christmas Neon Lighting Neon Lighting E Iectrical Room 2C T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C k t 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 Panel 2LCC c k t 1 3 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 23 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 P 0 e T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 120/208 volts 100 amps / 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse) 3 phase 14 wire LOCATION Spare Column Receptacles Spare POS System Receptacles Column Receptacles Column Receptacles Column Receptacles Mall Rolling Grill Spare Spare (3) Cash Registers Stock/Funtronics Receptacles Spare Spare Electrical Room Lighting Spare Spare Spare Spare KVA KVA 0.98 LOCATION Column Receptacles Column Receptacles Spare Column Receptacles Spare Spare Fitting Room Receptacles Fitting Room Receptacles POS System Receptacles Spare Spare Column Receptacles Column Receptacles Exit Alarms with 42 Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Exit Alarms Electrical Room 2C 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 REVISION NO.1 E LOT 115 REVIEWED far CODE COMPLIANCE NfPik 70 - NEC "---7---OW (*dila ILDING DIVISION RECEIVED APR 1 0 2000 PERMIT CENTER ce w 0 Z co ffi 0 w 0 1 2 Project Consultant: Project Architect: Robert Chafee 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741-3737 ScaFe: AS NOTED Date: 12-10-2007 Design: MJL Drawn: KJW CADD File: ME.2 Sheet Number: ME.2 3 1/28/2008 IN ALTERATI( 2 01/16/2008 P REVISIONS 1 12/11/2007 ADDENDUM #1 Issue: Date: Description: Panel 2LA 1 1 20 3 1 20 5 1 20 7 1 20 9 1 20 11 1 20 13 1 20 15 1 20 17 1 20 19 1 20 21 1 20 23 1 20 25 1 20 27 1 20 29 1 20 31 1 20 33 1 20 35 1 20 37 1 20 39 1 20 41 120/208 volts 200 amps 1 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse) 3 phase / c P T k 0 r t 1 i # e p LOCATION KVA Track Lighting Track Lighting Track Lighting Track Lighting Track Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Stock Room Lights General Lighting Janitor Room Receptacle Exterior Entry Lighting Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Blank Space 0.14 KVA LOCATION Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m West & Ctr Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting .. West & Ctr Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) Spare Spare Stock Room Lighting Stock Room Lighting Stock Room Lighting Stock Room Lighting Spare Spare Blank Space Electrical Room 2A T P c r 0 k i 1 t p e # 20 1 2 20 1 4 20 1 6 20 1 8 20 1 10 20 1 12 20 1 14 20 1 16 20 1 18 20 1 20 20 1 22 20 1 24 20 1 26 20 1 28 20 1 30 20 1 32 20 1 34 20 1 36 20 1 38 20 1 40 42 37 39 1 1 20 20 120/208 volts } 100 amps 1 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse) 3 phase/ 4 wire Panel 2LAA T k 0 r t 1 i # e p 1 1 20 3 1 20 5 1 20 7 1 20 9 1 20 11 1 20 13 1 20 15 1 20 17 1 20 19 1 20 21 1 20 23 1 20 25 1 20 27 1 20 29 1 20 31 1 20 33 1 20 35 1 20 41 LOCATION Spare Column Receptacles - Southwest Column Receptacles - Southwest Spare Spare Spare Spare S pare Spare Column Receptacles - Southwest Column Receptacles - Southwest Column Receptacles - Southwest Spare Exterior Entry - Power Assist Door S pare Spare S pare Spare Spare Circuit Column GG9 Spare Circuit Column GG9 Blank Space KVA KVA 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 LOCATION POS System Receptacles POS System Receptacles Sales Receptacles m Idea Center POS System Receptacles Column Receptacles - Southwest Column Receptacles - Southwest Receptacle - Passenger Elev - South Spare Column Receptacles m SW Storage Column Receptacles - SW Storage Column Receptacles - SW Storage Batt Pack /Lighting - North Escalator Blank Space Spare Spare Blank Space Blank Space Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater E Iectrical Room 2A a 1 1 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 15 15 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 G k t # 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 Panel ILB-2 c k t # 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 120/208 volts 100 amps 1 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse) 3 phase 1 4 wire LOCATION Light Boxes - Shoe Department Light Boxes - Shoe Department Exterior Light Boxes Blank Space Stock Room Lighting Blank Space Office & Hall Lighting Restroom Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m Sales Blank Space Spare KVA KVA 1.82 LOCATION Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m Center Blank Space Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Blank Space Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Track Lighting Spare Spare Blank Space Electrical Room 1B T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 20 20 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c k t 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 Panel 2LC c k t 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 120/208 volts 200 amps 1 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse) 3 phase 14 wire LOCATION Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Spare Track Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Cornice Lighting Track Lighting Spare Track Lighting Spare Track Lighting Spare Stock Lighting Spare Neon Lighting Spare KVA KVA 1.20 1.20 LOCATION Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting .. West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting w West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m East Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East Spare Mali Entry Sign Mall Entry Sign Spare Neon Lighting - Christmas Neon Lighting Neon Lighting E Iectrical Room 2C T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 P 0 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C k t 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 Panel 2LCC c k t 1 3 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 23 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 P 0 e T r p 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 120/208 volts 100 amps / 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse) 3 phase 14 wire LOCATION Spare Column Receptacles Spare POS System Receptacles Column Receptacles Column Receptacles Column Receptacles Mall Rolling Grill Spare Spare (3) Cash Registers Stock/Funtronics Receptacles Spare Spare Electrical Room Lighting Spare Spare Spare Spare KVA KVA 0.98 LOCATION Column Receptacles Column Receptacles Spare Column Receptacles Spare Spare Fitting Room Receptacles Fitting Room Receptacles POS System Receptacles Spare Spare Column Receptacles Column Receptacles Exit Alarms with 42 Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Exit Alarms Electrical Room 2C 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 REVISION NO.1 E LOT 115 REVIEWED far CODE COMPLIANCE NfPik 70 - NEC "---7---OW (*dila ILDING DIVISION RECEIVED APR 1 0 2000 PERMIT CENTER ce w 0 Z co ffi 0 w 0 1 2 Project Consultant: Project Architect: Robert Chafee 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741-3737 ScaFe: AS NOTED Date: 12-10-2007 Design: MJL Drawn: KJW CADD File: ME.2 Sheet Number: ME.2 0 0 rr w W o 0 0 0 0 W 'W _1 . . z •o, • o o N 0 • 0 (0• �° mco • o • • o • Addition Additional Aggregate Anchor (Anchorage) Arichor Holt Angle Approximate Architect At Hearn Bearing Between Block Bottom 13rick Hi,ildinq Cast 10 Place Ceiling Center Centerline Circle Clear Column Concrete Concrete Masonry Unit Connection Construction Construction Joint Continue or Continuous Contractor Control Joint Cubic Foot Cubic Inch Cubic Yard Dead Load Deep Depth Detail Depression Develop Diagonal Diameter Dimension Ditto Double Extra Strong Dowel Down Drawing Each Each Face Each Way Each Side East — West Electrical Elevation Elevator Engineer Equal Equally Spaced Equipment Equivalent Existing Expansion Expansion Anchor Expansion Bolt Expansion Joint Exterior Extra Strong Far Side Face to Face Finish Fireproof Flange Floor Flush Foot Footing Foundation Framing Gage or Gauge Galvanized Grade Grade Beam Headed Headed Anchor Bolt Headed Anchor Stud ABBREVIATIONS ADD ADDNL ACGR ANCH A.13 Al 1'ROX ARCI 1 13M I3RC 13IWN 13I K 1301 13RK RI DC C.I.P. cLG CTR CL CIR CLR COL CONC CMU CONN CONSTR C.J. CONT CONTR C.J. CU. FT CU. IN CU. YD DL DP DP DET or DTL DEPR DVL DIAG DIA DIM DO XX STRONG DWL DN DWG EA E.F. E.W. E.S. E —W ELEC EL ELEV ENGR EQ EQ. SP. EQPT EQUIV EXIST EXP EXP ANCH EXP BOLT EXP JT, E.J EXT X— STRONG F.S F to F FIN FPRF FLG FLR FL FT FTG FDN FRAM GA GALV GR GR.BM HD H.A.B. H.A.S. I eating Ventilating and Air Conditioning I leight Height x Width x Length Mori /onto1 Inside Diameter Inside [(ice Interior Joint Kip I ength I ight Weight Long Leg Vertical l onq Leg Horizontal Machine Room Manufacturer Masonry Material Maximum Mechanical Membrane Membrane Waterproofing Minimum Miscellaneous Moment Connections Not To Scale Number On Center Opening Opposite Opposite Hand Outside Diameter Outside Face Partition Penetration Plate (Steel) Plywood Precast Premolded Expansion Joint Property Line Radius Refer (Reference) Reinforce (ing) Reinforced Concrete Require Required Riser (Stair) Room Rough Opening Round Schedule Section Sheathing Short Leg Vertical Short Leg Horizontal Similar Slab on Ground Square Standard Steel Stiffener Stirrup Strength Structural Structure Support Top Top of Steel Top & Bottom Top of Conc Top Of Tread (stairs) Typical Vertical Waterproof Waterproofing Weight Welded Wire Fabric Width With Working Point Wood I IVAC HGT l ixWxl. IIURI/ ID I.f . INIR JI K I L1.WI LLV LLH MACH "RM. ME R MAS MATL MAX MECH MEMB MWP MIN MISC MC NTS NO or O.C. OPNG 0PP OPP.HD. O.D. 0.F. PTN PENE. PL PLYWD P/C P.E.J. ,PL RAD or F' RE: REINF. REINF.CONC. REQ REQ' D R RM RO RND or SCHED SECT SHTHG S LV SLH SIM. S.O.G. SO or STD STL STIFF STI R STR STRL STRUCT. 5PRT T T.O.S. T & B T.O.C. T.O. T TYP. VERT. WTRPRF WPG WT W.W.F. WD W/ WP WD BUILDING ADDRESS 400 SOU 1 I CENTER MALL i UKWII A, WASHINGTON BUILDING CODES 1 BUILDING CODE: 2. MECHANICAL CODE: 3. NLUMHING CODE: 4. ELECTRICAL CODE: 5. FIRE CODE: 6. ACCESSIBILITY CODE: 7. ENERGY CODE: 7. OTHER CODE: 2. OCCUPANCY GROUP: 3. CONSTRUCTION TYPE: 4. ASSESSOR TAX No.: BUILDING AREA 55,969 55,678 55,793 1 67,444 GROUND FLOOR SECOND FLOOR THIRD FLOOR TOTAL BUILDING INFORMATION CODE REVIEW SUMMARY 1. EVALUATED AS A THREE LEVEL RETAIL STORE FACILITY WHICH IS ATTACHED TO THE MALL BUILDING AND IS PROVIDED WITH THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS: FULL FIRE -- -EXTINGUISHING (SPRINKLER) SYSTEM. RETAIL: IV —MERCANTILE. AND S -1, STORAGE IIA 537920 -0330 2. AREA OF WORK FOR THIS PROJECT = 1 ,200 SF IBC — 2006 WITH WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS IMC — 2006 WITH WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS UPC — 2006 WITH WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS NEC • -- 2002 WITH WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS IFC — 2006 WITH WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS ICC /ANSI A117.1-1998 STATE ENERGY CODE AND INDOOR QUALITY CODE STATE BUILDING CODE LEGAL DESCRIPTION THAT PORTION OF THE NORTHWEST QUARTER OF SECTION 26, TOWNSHIP 23 NORTH, RANGE 4 EAST, W.M. DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: COMMENCING AT THE NORTHWEST CORNER OF THE NORTHEAST QUARTER OF SAID SECTION 26; THENCE N89 °40'24 "W ON AN EXTENSION OF THE NORTH LINE OF THE NORTHEAST QUARTER OF SAID SECTION 26, 23.00 FEET; THENCE SO °19'36 "W 433.32 FEET TO THE TRUE POINT OF BEGINNING; THENCE CONTINUING SO° 19'36 "W 257.58 FEET; THENCE N89 °40'24 "W 302 FEET; THENCE NO° 19'36 "W 236.16 FEET; THENCE S89 °40'24 "E 119.00 FEET; THENCE NO° 19'36 "E 21.42 FEET; THENCE S89 °40'24 "E 183.00 FEET TO THE TRUE POINT OF BEGINNING. SITUATED IN THE CITY OF TUKWILA, COUNTY OF KING, STATE OF WASHINGTON z. / YN F?? � YA IFiY•Y?F 8�6'Yl' 9 �• / . :: ;::: t: f ,,,,..,.,77,...,:).„,„„.......,..:,,:,.: ,,,.:... .7e....1 'ti f •: /// Yl / d' F Fi i ,, f l:: 4 . 5X„./ • • • ./../52 Y? /"/::' � ,byvy Fr ,: ✓'3JH / /H /f // 41Xf / /H /f1Ayf /fH /JHH // .. - - - -YFf -- -~• / /i %'iH HJiJI. y aFiF uu a + #au !ll ao riwanmYH?wY'F o /., 1:3 !K: i,?J�:t•�:: `:F:s �jit �;> • ....uv, ..?.w /,w •.,.w.vr.c > #vc;;• : ?...,... :: .,c/ ....�.�./ F 5'P ✓�Ff..;u.. .r'ffh::::,n•:::::: N:::F:�/:. }.: /H•HiHYHi ////// • yy y[N.m�M6MXxbwd �' f?�'.; +"•?' _ ! / / /.C/ / f�IHFfIfF fNJ'RYFI TRY .«J.:v:.StS✓ f v YF« w �•'! j.;rgYgfFFMkwOC'//M w', f .:.: .. .. .asyrfi ?::+r.Fi.Grlv:s::xc'am m,rrau.:.vrc. xmm& ? xarf F .a�.;7'+p' H' .«HVexiax eHave_ h Yv?:?:?:: r: n•: r: ry ::.v?uc5x:uexexvunncxeevabxa[� .aeeb:0�0Y.4YFfffi.5}.. ...t..?F.fiY U F. .: :� }¢ F•ry /._ .F ?.: f ?v�Niry' }:t:';Y•9 F�:. '�' N�:bv.. t .�. • - F k .... ... ... :. • % . i fiF6YFF:}+' :O MGY +?: :.::Yiry'� tnti'F fnc}a�o' ,c�ciq.yfF & YY.HF F ,: Sf.,f++ eewweeeeufef ? F«Y o' HACCWNG .t?I.CG.<ii4fvW?'FF.CK?igC� y .�;.; f++1 FHX• « �nYS' HHOf'f - +o4oF 4•a'??F?f ..:.:.....: 400 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKWILA, WAS INGTON 98188 NEW SECOND LEVEL EXTERIOR & MAIN ENTRIES ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A -0 COVER SHEET, INDEX, ABBREVIATIONS, NOTES, AND LOCATION MAP A -1 SECOND LEVEL REFERENCE PLAN AND EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A -2 ENLARGED FLOOR AND CEILING PLANS A -3 WALL SECTIONS A -4 DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE ME -1 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PLAN (MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR (SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR PROJECT CONSULTANT: S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741-3737 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY REVIEW THE DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SITE TO VERIFY ALL SITE CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPORT ANY INCONSISTENCIES TO THE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY FOR RESOLUTION BEFORE BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. ALL PHASES OF WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE MINIMUM STANDARDS OF THE BUILDING CODE CURRENTLY USED BY THE CITY, STATE AND LOCAL ORDINANCES THAT MAY APPLY. HOWEVER, WHERE THE DRAWINGS AND /OR SPECIFICATIONS ARE MORE STRINGENT THEY SHALL GOVERN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM THE ARCHITECT OF ANY CODE DISCREPANCY PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OF WORK. ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH OSHA STANDARDS. ALL DIMENSIONS SHALL HAVE PRECEDENCE OVER SCALING THE DRAWINGS. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF CONCRETE OR MASONRY, CENTERLINE OF BEAM OR COLUMNS AND TO FACE OF STUD, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. THE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND FIRE SPRINKLER VIODIFICATIONS, INCLUDING DESIGN, ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL PROTECTION REQUIRED TO ADEQUATELY PROTECT PERSONNEL AND ADJACENT PROPERTY AND TO ENSURE THE SAFETY OF THE PUBLIC AND STRUCTURE THROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, WASHINGTON STATE REGULATIONS FOR BARRIER FREE DESIGN, WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE, AND ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES, ORDINANCES, AND STANDARDS CONTRACTOR IS TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS, DIMENSIONS, DETAILS, ETC, AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY AND ALL DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO PROCEEDNG WITH THE WORK CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE RELEVANT CITY AND STATE APPROVALS RELATING TO FIRE, CONSTRUCTION, _ABOR, HEALTH, AND LICENSING. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURTHER POST ALL BONDS AND SECURE ALL INSURANCE REQUIRED BY LAW OR CONTRACT, FORWARDING PROOF OF SUCH ACTIONS TO THE OWNER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE AND PROVIDE ALL PERMITS FOR OCCUPANCY, UTILITIES AND ANY OTHERS REQUIRED BY GOVERNING AUTHORITIES BEYOND THE BASIC BUILDING PERMIT, MAKING TIMELY APPLICATIONS AND INQUIRIES, PAYING ALL FEES AND POSTING ALL BONDS TO BE RELEASED AT THE COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION EXIT SIGNS AND EMERGENCY EXIT ILLUMINATION SHALL CONFORM TO THE 2006 IBC CHAPTER 10 AND LOCAL JURISDICTION REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT LIGHTING AS REQUIRED BY JURISDICTIONAL FIRE AND BUILDING DEPARTMENTS. CONFIRM ACCEPTABILITY OF LOCATIONS WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE BEFORE INSTALLATION PROVIDE BIDDER DESIGNED FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. SYSTEM SHALL BE DESIGNED AND SUBMITTED TO THE FIRE MARSHALL AND /OR APPROPRIATE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION DRAWINGS INDEX GENERAL NOTES PROJECT ARCHITECT: Robert Chafee S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO (303) 741-3737 80237 FILE COPY Pennft Platt Wow appmeral b subject to ems ands. Approval ctoonsh: ondacwwnontsdoes notes the violation at any � adapted Cede at O• Receipt at approved Reid City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE E NEC NFPA - 7 2008 City Of Tukwila WILDING _ D . ION ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEW AND FREE OF DEFECTS. ALL P,1ATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE OF THE HIGHEST QUALM AND CONFORM TO ACCEPTABLE INDUSTRY /TRADE STANDARDS. ALL RUBBISH AND DEBRIS RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION AND /OR NEW WORK SHALL BE DISPOSED OF OFF —SITE. MAINTAIN BUILDING AREAS CLEAN AND FREE OF DEBRIS ON A DAILY BASIS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIRING ANY DAMAGE TO EXISTING STRUCTURES OR ITEMS AND NEWLY INSTALLED MATERIALS DURING CONSTRUCTION. ALL CONTRACTORS, SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND ALL OTHER TRADES INVOLVED IN THE WORK OR PORTION THEREOF SHALL REVIEW THE COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND HAVE KNOWLEDGE OF ALL THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY ALL TRADES THAT EFFECTS SAID WORK AND COORDINATE THEIR WORK WITH SAID CONTRACTORS, SUBCONTRACTORS AND TRADES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK AND SCHEDULE WITH THE OWNER AND USERS OF ALL ADJACENT BUILDINGS AND PROPERTIES. CONTRACTOR SHALL KEEP A RECORD SET OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS .ON ' SITE AT ALL TIMES AND SHALL RECORD ALL ALTERATIONS FROM THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. ALL LAY—IN ACCOUSTICAL CEILING GRIDS, LIGHT FIXTURES AND DIFFUSERS SHALL BE INSTALLED AND SECURED PER LOCAL SEISv1IC REQUIREMENTS THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THAT THIS PROJECT, AND ALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES RELATED THERETO, CONFORM WITH ALL LOCAL, REGIONAL, STATE, AND /OR FEDERAL REGULATIONS PERTAINING TO DISTURBING, DISPLACING, AND /OR REv OVAL OF ASBESTOS OR ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS. NOTE SPECIFICALLY, THAT THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFORM WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PUGET SOUND AIR POLLUTION CONTROL AGENCY REGARDING, INSPECTION, CERTIFICATION AND NOTIFICATION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA Nov 2 7 2001' f10 • ".n 6EPARATE REQUIRED FOH: EIectric&1 VPiumbiog ..L Gas City of T t.f :.; • No changes s ',i -iii , r , !'. sb, ^..cn d work without •_ • 1 ..'t Tukwila Bk)' ... :.: ; :=:1° ,. �: se isions will req re , ' Flcv plan submittal and may include additional par Teview tees. SEARS- TUKWILA, WASHINGTON PRICING /PERMIT ISSUE 9407 REGISTERED ARCHIT CT / " ` POSER S. EE JR. STATE OF WASHINGTON arm 19 NOVEMBER 2007 JOB NO: 07164 NEW BRIDGE FROM PARKING GARAGE Illlillllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll ., -..s.:.. R- �..��i �= =•=-= a= ?- �_z '�,� --=..- - ��= �"�;... °'::.�.' �' -.*��, �-�,,Tr..�sw:� ��c.^�. �':ix r�:�i-- ..` =- %.� t='m'�..'°; T:� w� s5���; M�. �,: �.;" � -:� ;,;�:.. ill • mw ae►grew..laaare+re9si WI eemamo YY561iR IN �:121]11IiiG�7 4�3aliNgIM IPMEp9O MINE REIN 0lr.r •• . i. ∎� . .w. BYM11 110111CRO iMINIANORE R3i971f161 1111MIENw'wl IIIINCillf9llMISIMEININ ._ . asapapar .m®.aaaz.gniassoaz ®ccomensssaro araaRam suouzgaasuo .c:raaslim.m...■._3gsyna1 =w.w11691 wrPwwwwww� :ww:i�wwwi ' ► /— ii! �rr�wwwwww�wwwwwwlrw�,wwwwww; rr . I js1 i i•��/ iwrt�wllwww` :al ETA Wee. wrr ∎wwimmmu wwwww. ■ww1 wwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwww• l__. rmmmiiminumi r!rlwl wwwwwwwwwwww mptio. wwwpwwwww rai us =Wm al fa IN __ Worm �rlw1 wwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwww vwl wwww wwwwwwwwwww_wwwww _ ww ...is � iir::�: farew_ w m i:��oW.::ii A1.O A1.O EXISTING LOCATION OF BRICK LEDGE SUPPORT ANGLE EXISTING EAST ELEVATION NEW EAST ELEVATION 1 - I EXISTING SOUTH ELEVATION SEARS REMOVE PORTION OF EXTERIOR WALL FOR NEW MALL ENTRY ' RE: DETAILS FOR SIZE AND EXTENT (MEC) WALL MOUN �� � LIGHTING FIXTURES N RE: ELECTRICAL (M w // 1 11 +� NEW SOUTH ELEVATION NEW STORE FRONT ENTRY (MEC) NEW BRIDGE BY MALL SCALE: 1/16" = SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0" SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0" 1 SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0" i EXISTING LOCATION OF BRICK LEDGE SUPPORT ANGLE f 1[ EXISTING BRICK FACADE OVER CMU WITH CONCRETE STRUCTURE REMOVE PORTION OF EXTERIOR WALL FOR NEW MALL ENTRY RE: DETAILS FOR SIZE AND EXTENT (MEC) MALL ENTRY FACADE TILE BY MALL 4' -0 SEARS SI PLAN A2.0 & ME -1 FOR AD N N RE: LECTRICAL L INFO. NEW SEARS MALL ENTRY EXISTING BRICK FACADE OVER CMU WITH CONCRL I E STRUCTURE %/lij f i. s � : i 1 111.511 - 111 rrrr.r rrrrrru FIRE LANE NO PARKING CEILING FLOOR NEW SECOND LEVEL SEARS EX t ERI OR ENTRY &AO' -r -2 . SECOND LEVEL REFERENCE PLAN *N 0 SCALE: 1/16" = 1'— SI- ARS R SECO \D LTA I L L H STORE L / CEILING FLOOR • V ALL PARK \I G GARAGE SECOVD LLVEL 0 • rrr.rrr 1 MIME MUMMERS rrrrrrr rrrrrrr NEJ' 1 SEGONI LEVEL SEA - MALL ENTRY C EXISTING SEAR EXTERIOR EN I LEVEL BELOIAI MALL GOURTYA' q \ 1 1 V ALL S LEV -C D NEIN MALL ENTRY AT IST LEVEL BELOVAI 11 RECEIVED cn OF TUKWILA NOV 27 2001 (MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR (SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR ELD7- � IS 0° T / ` 0 ■ ■ ■ ■■ MEM ■ ■ IIII1S ■• ;` ■■■■■```s` 0 glimmms =mum OmmommEm mishN 'mums ::::;:■:■ AMMWOMMEM Project Architect: Robert Chafee S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741 -3737 Project Consultant: S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 5- Ulster Street Suite 1501 Denver, CO (303) 741 —3737 Contact: Milt Lanser 11/19/2007 11/07/2007 2 Issue: Dote: Z a W 0 �Z LU O LL. Q °C w J J W W 9 J O Cr O � ZW OX w W cd Scale: AS NOTED Date: 11/01/2007 Design: MJL Drawn: KJW CADD File: A1.0 Sheet Number: Parkway 80237 PRICING /PERMIT REVIEW Description: A1.0 CEILING LEGEND (DASHED TO BE REMOVED) SYMBOLS (DEMOLITION) DESCRIPTION SYMBOLS (NEW) r LJ El En k. L_ J - 1 - I - -L 1 1 1 1 SECURITY CAMERA CEIUNG MOUNTED EXIT SIGN WALL MOUNTED EXIT SIGN SPEAKER SPRINKLERS 4' -0" STRIP LIGHT 10 "X24" FLUORESCENT WALL WASHER 10 "X48" FLUORESCENT WALL WASHER 2x2 W /(3) FLUORESCENT LAMPS RECESSED CAN LIGHT TRACK LIGHTING WALL MOUNTED OUTSIDE LIGHT CEILING DIFFUSER (SUPPLY AIR) CEILING DIFFUSER (RETURN AIR) 24 "x24" ACCESS PANEL SHADED AREA INDICATES AREA OF CEILING WORK 2X2 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE GRID WORK (REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR CEILING HEIGHTS) GYPSUM BOARD CEILING WORK REFER TO CEILING PLAN FOR HEIGHTS g COD 7 >CI VI Iv v DEMO FLOOR PLAN LEGEND /NOTES: GENERAL NOTES 1. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND DEMOLITION SUBCONTRACTOR TO PROTECT ALL ITEMS WHICH ARE NOT INTENDED TO BE DEMOLISHED. PARTICULARLY NOTE ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING WHICH IS TO REMAIN INCLUDING THE DATA /TELEPHONE SYSTEM, ALARM SYSTEM AND SPEAKER SYSTEM. PARTS OF THESE SYSTEMS NOT PARTICULARLY NOTED TO BE REMOVED ARE TO REMAIN. REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENT OF THESE SYSTEMS OR PORTIONS THEREOF TO ORIGINAL CONDITION REQUIRED DUE TO DEMOLITION ACTIVITIES WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH OWNER PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH DEMOLITION WORK. COORDINATE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION, PROTECTION, SALVAGE AND FINISHES TO REMAIN. 3. THE OWNER HAS CONDUCTED AN INVESTIGATION FOR ASBESTOS MATERIALS. REMOVAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL WILL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY THE OWNER UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT. IF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR DETECTS OR BELIEVES HAZARDOUS MATERIALS EXISTS, CONTACT THE OWNER IMMEDIATELY AND DO NOT DISTURB THE AREAS IN QUESTION. 4. ALL CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN 15 TO BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION WORK TO AVOID DAMAGE. ALL DAMAGE DUE TO DEMOLITION WORK IS TO BE REPAIRED BY DEMOLITION CONTRACTOR TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. 5. COLUMN TEXTURE ON ADJACENT COLUMNS IS TO MATCH EXISTING. RELOCATE THERMOSTATS AND OTHER ITEMS TO FACE OF COLUMN. 6. REMOVAL OF EXISTING CEILINGS, WALLS OR OTHER ELEMENTS, IN SOME CASES, RELATES TO EXACT LOCATIONS OF NEW FLOORS OR WALLS. COORDINATE EXACT EXTENT OF DEMOLITION WITH NEW LAYOUT. 7. EXISTING FIXTURE WALLS ARE TO BE REMOVED IN A MANNER TO ALLOW THE RE -USE OF FIXTURE WALLS- COORDINATE WITH SEARS PROJECT MANAGER FOR RE-USE FOR THIS LOCATION, OR IF FIXTURE WALL PARTS ARE TO BE PACKAGED AND SHIPPED TO ANOTHER LOCATION. EXISTING CARPET, ETC. FLOOR FINISH TO BE REMOVED TO CONCRETE SURFACES IN DESIGNATED AREAS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FLOOR SURFACE TO BE PREPARED TO RECEIVE NEW FLOOR FINISH MATERIAL. 8 . 9. SHADED AREAS INDICATE AREA OF FLOORING DEMOLITION. LOOR FINISHES WALL /DOOR LEGEND (DEMOLITION) F STONE TILE TO REMAIN NEW STONE TILE CARPET TO REMAIN CARPET TO BE REMOVED NEW CARPET CONCRETE TO REMAIN CONCRETE (PREPARE FOR FLOOR FINISH) EXISTING WALL TO BE REMOVED I = EXISTING FIXTURE WALL TO BE REMOVED WALL /DOOR LEGEND (NEW) EXISTING WALL (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) NEW FIXTURE WALL BY SEARS - RE. Q /A4,0 NEW METAL STUD WALLS TO STRUCTURE RE: P /A4,0 FLOOR PLAN LEGEND /NOTES: GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO SHEET A4.0 FOR DOOR SCHEDULE. DOOR NUMBERS INDICATED THUS: 2- PATCH ALL EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN WITH UNFINISHED FACES OR ENDS AS A RESULT OF DEMOLITION. 3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY DEFICIENCIES NOTED IN PROVIDING PROPER HANDICAP ACCESSIBILITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL CODES. 4. AUDIBLE DOOR ALARM AND NEW EXTERIOR DOOR CONTACTS FOR BURGLAR SYSTEM ARE TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER A SEPARATE ALARM CONTRACTOR. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE ALARM CONTRACTORS WORK AND PREPARE ALL ITEMS FOR SINGLE ALARM CONTRACTOR VISIT TO COMPLETE ALL ALARM WORK. ALARM CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL REQUIRED CONNECTIONS AND WIRING TO ALARM PANELS IN ASSET PROTECTION AREA 5. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE A RIGID FRAMED CONSTRUCTION BARRIER, FLOOR TO CEILING, COMPLETELY SURROUNDING EACH AREA BEING WORKED ON AND COVERED WITH WHITE, OPAQUE, FIRE PROOF FACING MATERIAL. FLOORING NOTES TILE AND CARPET AREA PREPARATION SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS (FURNISH & INSTALL SPECIFIED FLOOR LEVELING MATERIALS): • FLOOR LEVELING COMPOUND TO BE UTILIZED AS NEEDED. ▪ PREPARE SURFACE PER SUPPLIERS RECOMMENDATIONS. FEATHER SURFACE TO ADJACENT FLOOR FINISH MATERIAL. • INSTALL SPECIFIED FLOOR- LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT CONCRETE COMPOUND (INCLUDING PRIMER AND OTHER PRE - APPLICATION PREPARATION) IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED REQUIREMENTS TO ACHIEVE A FLOOR FLATNESS NUMBER F(F) OF 32 AND A FLOOR LEVELNESS NUMBER F(L) OF 20. 2. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL REQUIRED TRANSITIONS BETWEEN DIFFERENT FLOORING MATERIALS. 3. FURNISH AND INSTALL VINYL WALL BASE AT NEW DRYWALL AREAS. INSTALL SEARS FURNISHED FOUR (4 ") INCH CARPET BASE AT CARPETED SALES AREAS AND AT NEW DRYWALL WALL AND COLUMN ENCLOSURES. 4. REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATI ❑NS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS, 5. VERIFY FINAL FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS AND LAYOUT WITH SEARS FIELD PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATI ❑N OF ANY MATERIALS. 6. NEW TILE IN SALES AREAS TO MATCH EXISTING TILE, GROUT, AND PATTERN JOINTS, INSTALL TRANSITI ❑N EDGING AS REQUIRED. SALES DEMO CEILING PLAN LEG. /NOTES: GENERAL NOTES 1. EXISTING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING (SAT) DEMOLITION: REMOVE AREA OF CEILING AS INDICATED. REMOVE FULL SECTION OF ANY AFFECTED CROSS TEE GRID. REMOVE MAIN TEE GRID PAST AFFECTED AREA AND TO PROVIDE 4' -0" MINIMUM STAGGER BETWEEN ADJACENT MAIN GRID UNITS. TERMINATE MAIN TEE GRID IN A MANNER APPROVED BY NEW CEILING INSTALLER AND ARCHITECT. 2. LOCATIONS WHERE EXISTING FIXTURE WALLS OR CEILING TRANSITIONS ARE REMOVED, REMOVE ALL DRYWALL, STUDS, BRACING, AND BAFFLE DROPS AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW INSTALLATION OF NEW CEILING SYSTEM. 3. EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES ARE TO REMAIN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED AND ARE TO BE PROTECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION FROM DAMAGE. ANY DAMAGED FIXTURE 15 TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED. COORDINATE DEMOLITION CEILING PLAN WITH NEW CEILING PLAN AND SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWINGS. 4. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND CEILING DIFFUSERS IN CEILINGS TO BE DEMOLISHED ARE TO BE CAREFULLY REMOVED AND STOCK PILED AT THE PROJECT SITE IN A PROTECTED LOCATION DESIGNATED BY THE OWNER. 5. CEILINGS NOTED TO BE REMOVED INCLUDE ALL CEILING MATERIALS, SUPPORT STRUCTURE, GRID, HANGER WIRE, AND ALL OTHER CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATED THEREWITH. CEILING PLAN LEGEND /NOTES: GENERAL NOTES REPAIR /REPLACE CEILING ELEMENTS AT EXISTING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE (SAT) CEILING ATTACHMENTS WHICH ARE REMOVED INCLUDING WALLS, SUSPENDED DRYWALL BAFFLES OR OTHER ELEMENTS WHICH IN ANY WAY LEAVE OBSERVABLE DAMAGE OR MARKINGS TO TILE OR GRID 50 THAT THERE IS NO NOTICEABLE VARIATION TO SURROUNDING MATERIALS: A- CROSS TEE GRID: REPLACE AFFECTED 4' -0" LONG CROSS TEE GRID ELEMENT TO MATCH EXISTING. B. MAIN TEE GRID: REPLACE DAMAGED SECTION OF MAIN TEE GRID AS RECOMMENDED BY ORIGINAL GRID MANUFACTURER OR REPAIR HOLES AND PAINT TO MATCH AS APPROVED BY SEARS PROJECT MANAGER. 2. ALL NEW CEILING AREAS ARE TO BE SUSPENDED AND BRACED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROJECT DOCUMENTS AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING LIGHTING FIXTURES. 3. PAINT ALL NEW DRYWALL CEILINGS 4. CLEAN CEILING DIFFUSERS, SPEAKERS AND OTHER CEILING MOUNTED ITEMS TO REMAIN IN AREA OF WORK ENCLOSURE. 5. INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL OF EXISTING CEILING PENETRATIONS IS TO BE COORDINATED WITH ALL TRADES TO PROVIDE FINISHED CEILING SURFACE AT ALL LOCATIONS. 6. ALL AREAS WITH NO CEILINGS ARE TO BE SEPARATED FROM THE CEILING PLENUM AREA BY A MINIMUM OF ONE LAYER OF 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD. 7. FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS ARE SHOWN AS EXISTING LOCATIONS AND ARE TO BE USED FOR INFORMATION ONLY AND ARE TO BE FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR. THE CONTRACTOR(S) ARE RESPONSIBLE TO REMOVE, RELOCATE, REPLACE AND ADD NEW HEADS AS REQUIRED TO MEET SPECIFICATIONS, FIRE AND LOCAL CODES. REFER TO PROJECT MANUAL FOR PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS_ 8. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LIGHTING SCOPE OF WORK. LIGHT FIXTURES ARE TO BE PROTECTED FROM DAMAGE AND DEBRIS AND DUST DURING CONSTRUCTION AND UNTIL SEARS ACCEPTANCE. 9. REFER TO AND COORDINATE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. SALES 8' - O" 1 -2 v v X x EXISTING CEILING 1 1' -1 0 1 /2" AFF (7 DEMO CEILING PLAN AT BRIDGE DEMO MALL ENTRY CEILING PLAN A /A2.0 FLAG NOTES Al REMOVE EXISTING STRIP LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: M.E. DRAWING (SIC) A2 MODIFY EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS AND PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR NEV CEILING AND WALL LAYOUT (SIG) A3 REMOVE /RELOCATE EXISTING RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS - PROVIDE CEILING TILE TO MATCH EXISTING AT PRIOR LIGHTING FIXTURE LOCATIONS (51 G) SCALE: 1/8" = 1' E /A2.O FLAG NOTES El REMOVE EXISTING AGOUSTI GAL SYSTEM CEILING AS REQUIRED TO CONSTRUCT NEW DRYWALL MALL ENTRY SOFFIT (MEG) E2 MODIFY EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS AND PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR NEW CEILING AND WALL LAYOUT (SIG) E3 REMOVE /RELOCA I E EXISTING RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS - PROVIDE CEILING TILE TO MATCH EXISTING AT PRIOR LIGHTING FIXTURE LOCATIONS AS REQUIRED (MEG) SCALE: 1/8" = V- .00/ ' - fff oa.Yy' �VF ARA f / /./f. n. ifi.•a'f, fePli# JfQ'lf - ' fc a�yf,, f4 fy fun 0 v v v 0 B /A2.O FLAG NOTES BI SHADED AREA INDICATES NEW SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE GEILING AREA TO MATCH EXISTING - BRACE AS REQUIRED (SIG) 52 NEW HVAG DIFFUSER LOCATIONS - RE: M.E. DRAWING (SIG) B3 NEW ELECTRICAL CEILING HEATERS - RE: M.E. DRAWINGS (SIC) 54 PROVIDE NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: M.E. DRAWINGS (SIG) NEW CEILING PLAN AT BRIDGE EXISTING 14 x CEILING 11 -10 11/2" LAA ii ❑ AFF v 1 4 NEW MALL ENTRY CEILING PLAN EXISTING 0' -0' AFF SCALE: 1/8" = 1'- 1 MILZJ CEILING 0 0 F /A2.O FLAG NOTES F I NEW DROPPED MALL ENTRY DRYWALL SOFFIT AT 10 AFF (MEG) F2 SLOT FOR NEW MALL ENTRY ROLLING GRILL (MEG) F3 NEW 24X24 PAIN I tD ACCESS DOOR (TWO LOCATIONS) LOCATE FOR MANUAL CHAIN DRIVE AND FOR MOTOR ACCESS (MEC) F4 SHADED AREA INDICATES NEV SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING AREA TO MATCH EXISTING - BRACE AS REQUIRED (MEG) F5 PROVIDE NEV' LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: M.E. DRAWINGS (MEC) SCALE: 1/8" = 1' x LJ LA EXISTING STOCK ROOM • GI A2.0 FLAG NOTES GI REMOVE EXISTING FIXTURE WALL SYSTEM AND TURN OVER TO SEARS FOR RE -USE. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR. REMOVE EXISTING METAL STUD AND DRYWALL SYSTEM TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE (SIG) G2 REMOVE EXISTING 6" CLAY TILE WALL AND METAL STUD WALL (5IG) G5 EXISTING GMU SHAFT WALLS TO REMAIN G4 EXISTING FURRED DRYWALL AT GMU TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS (ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL) AT NEW OPENING AREA COORDINATE WORK WITH SEARS. REMOVE FURRING MEMBERS AS REQUIRED. G5 REMOVE EXISTING 4" BRICK AND 8" REINFORCED MASONRY BACKUP. REMOVE BRICK FROM BELOW FLOOR LEVEL AS INDICATED ON DRAWING UP TO BOTTOM OF LEDGER ANGLE ABOVE NEW OPENING. REMOVE SECTION OF INTERMEDIATE LEDGER ANGLE IN OPENING. REMOVE GMU FROM CONGRE I E FLOOR TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE AND REPAIR CONCRETE AS REQUIRED AT ATTACHMENTS AND REINFORCING (MEG) 06 AREA OF FLOOR TILE TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS (ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL) - COORDINATE WORK WITH SEARS. 67 PREPARE EXISTING STOCK ROOM CONCRETE FLOOR FOR CARPET AND TILE FINISH. STOCK ROOM CONTENTS AND SALES AREA FIXTURINE7 TO BE RELOCATED BY SEARS (SIG) Gs REMOVE EXISTING CARPET IN PREPARATION FOR NEW AISLE TILE (SIG) CG EXISTING AISLE TILE TO REMAIN. GIO PROTECT TWO EXISTING DATA CABLE SLEEVES AND GABLE AND PREPARE FOR NEW ENLARGED COLUMN ENCLOSURE (SIG) DEMO FLOOR PLAN AT BRIDGE LJ Ir1 LA LA SALES SCALE: 1/8" = 1'- TEMPORARY PROTECTION WALL BY SIC G /A2.O FLAG NOTES GI REMOVE EXISTING FIXTURE WALL SYSTEM AND TURN OVER TO SEARS FOR RE -USE. REMOVE EXISTING METAL STUD AND DRYWALL SYSTEM TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE (51 G) 62 REMOVE EXISTING 4" BRICK AND 8 REINFORCED MASONRY BACKUP. REMOVE BRICK FROM BELOW FLOOR LEVEL AS INDICATED ON DRAWING UP TO BOTTOM OF LEDGER ANGLE ABOVE NEW OPENING. REMOVE SECTION OF IN f LRMEDIATE LEDGER ANGLE IN OPENING. REMOVE GMU FROM GONGRE 1 f FLOOR TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE AND REPAIR CONCRETE AS REQUIRED AT ATTACHMENTS AND RE I NFORO I NO (MEG) 03 REMOVE EXISTING CARPET IN PREPARATION FOR NEV'! AISLE TILE (SIG) 04 EXISTING AISLE TILE TO REMAIN. 05 EXISTING FURRED DRYWALL AT GMU TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS (SUSPECT ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL) AT NEW OPENING AREA - COORDINATE WORK WITH SEARS. REMOVE FURRING MEMBERS AS REQUIRED. DEMO MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'- TEIPORARY PROTECTION WALL BY SIC D /A2.0 FLAG NO I ES DI NEW FIXTURE WALL FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY SEARS. D2 NEW BRACED METAL STUD DROP FROM STRUCTURE ABOVE AT FIXTURE WALL - RE: DETAILQ /A4.O (SI0). D3 NEVI METAL STUD WALL AND DRYWALL - RE: DETAIL P /A4.O (5IG). D4 NEW CARPET FURNISHED BY SEARS AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED TO TIE INTO MATCHING EXISTING CARPETING (SIG). D5 INSTALL NEW TILE AT AISLE (TILE ONLY FURNISHED 5Y SEARS) TO MATCH EXISTING (SIG). D6 EXISTING TILE AT AISLE TO REMAIN. D� HANDICAPPED POWER ASSIST DOOR BUTTON (HARD WIRED) AT 36" AFF TO CENTERLINE. SINGLE DOOR ON EXTREME WEST TO HAVE POWER ASSIST OPER'\TOR. RE: M.E. DRAWING (MEG). DP EXTERIOR POWER ASSIST DOOR BUTTON (RADIO OPERATED) AND STAINLESS STEEL POST. COORDINATE INSTALLATION ON MALL CONSTRUCTED BRIDGE (MEG). DG BRIDGE FROM PARKING GARAGE SECOND LEVEL BY MALL. DIO MALL TO PROVIDE FOR FIRST FIVE FEET OF BRIDGE SURFACE TO SLOPE AT NO MORE THAN 2% I N ANY DIRECTION T71 LA r LJ H A2.0 WOLII Aft A4.0 • • 11,11•1 11 ■1111 1111111 ■ ■Y ■ ■I■ ■■■ ■RI ■■ �i .. ■ ■ ..m ■ ■. .ee.Eee.es• III I I ■■ ■ ■■■ ■ ■I _ ■■ ■■ ■ ■ ■■ ■I 1 D4 - � ■■■■■ ■■I.M ■••••••••• - u� INEMESII IN ■••••••■••07 � ■■, ■■■7I■ ■••••••■P - r im. I ■ ■ ■l ■ ■ ■ ■ ■H �� 1 . 1■■UI■ =■■■■■I .�I. • ■■■7I■ ■■ ■ ■■ ■111 M NT, a cH A4 0 7111111M .M i 1/110 %V G 1 J)..i. NEW FLOOR PLAN AT BRIDGE D8 LA ( 1 -IO" cN NEW MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN SALES SCALE: 1/8" = 1'- R ED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE NFPA 70 - NEC City Of Tukwila B ILDING D . ION H /A2.O FLAG NOTES HI INSTALL NEV' TILE AT AISLE (TILE ONLY FURNISHED BY SEARS) TO MATCH EXISTING (SIC) H2 EXISTING TILE AT AISLE TO REMAIN. H3 LOCATION OF KEYED SWITCH FOR MALL ENTRY ROLLING GRILL AT 42 AFF (MEG) H4 NEW MALL SECOND LEVEL AND ESCALATOR (NOl THAT MALL SECOND LEVEL FLOOR TRANSITIONS UP 6.5 TO SEARS SECOND LEVEL FLOOR AT 2% MAXIMUM SLOPE). H5 LOCATION OF NEW SEARS MALL ENTRY SIGN - SIGN FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS - ELECTRICAL POWER BY SEARS CONTRACTOR (MEG) - NOTE THAT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT ROUGH -IN LOCATION 15 CRITICAL SINGE ACCESS BEHIND WALL RECEIVED WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE - OBTAIN SIGNAGE ELECTRICAL TEMPLATE FROM SIONeI•ry orr uKwiLA SUPPLIER AND INSTALL CONDUIT ROUGH-IN TO MATCH REQUIREMENTS FOR SIGN - SIGN BACKING (5/4" PLYWOOD) TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MALL NOV 27 2007 LO 71 5 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'- L (MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR (SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR ROBERT S. CHAFEE JR. STATE OF WASHINGTON Project Consultant: S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Sheet Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO (303) 741 - 3737 Contact: Milt Lanser Project Architect: Robert Chafee S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 5. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741 -3737 11/19/2007 11/07/2007 2 Issue: CO Z a Z J W V Z 0 0 J LL Dote: Scale: AS NOTED Date: 11/07/07 Design: MJL Drown: KJW CADD File: A2.0 Sheet Number: 80237 PRICING /PERMIT REVIEW Description: A2.0 THIRD LEVEL ELEV. (63.SE A3.0 SECOND LEVEL ELEV. (47.25) \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ • Gt. NEV TILE FLOOR - RE: SHEET A2.O FOR FLOOR PLAN • •• DEMO SECTION AT NEW EXTERIOR ENTRY NEW SECTION AT NEW EXTERIOR ENTRY 4 • 4: 4 o •• :4 IIIT Ir L SCALE: 1 /2" = 1 -0" SCALE: 1 /2" = 1 ' -0" -H I EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE TO REMAIN 4" BRICK MASONRY TO BE REMOVED AS INDICATED FROM BELOW FLOOR UP TO BOTTOM OF EXISTING BRICK LEDGE ANGLE (MEG) BOTTOM OF EXISTING BRIGK LEDGE SUPPORT ANGLE (MEC) 8" REINFORCED GMU TO BE REMOVED FROM CONCRETE FLOOR TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE DRYWALL AT FURRING IS TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS (SUSPECT ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL) DRYWALL AND METAL STUD BAFFLE DROP AND BRACING TO BE REMOVED BACK TO STRUCTURE (SIG) F IXTURE WALL TO BE DISMANTLED AND TURNED OVER TO OWNER FOR REUSE (SIG) EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING SYS I 1 M TO REMAIN - REMOVE AS REQUIRE TO DEMOLISH WALL (SIG) EXISTING CEILING AT 10' -0 AFF TO REMAIN EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE TO REMAIN FIRST LEVEL ALL AND SOFFIT TO REMAIN NOTE: REFER TO PLAN FOR OPENING DIMENSIONS NEW INSULATED FROS 1 1-D OPAQUE PANELS IN STOREFRONT FRAMING (MEG) NEW 5 5/8 X 16 GA STUD (36 AT 24" O.G. WITH I6 GAGE TRACK TOP AND BOTTOM. PROVIDE R -15 BATT INSULATION WITH RETAINER AND DENS GLASS &OLD EXTERIOR SHEATHING - SECURE TRACK TO STRUCTURE AT EACH STUD WITH TWO 2" TAPCON SCREWS (MEG) NEW DOUBLE 5 5/8"X 16 GA STUD (5625162 -55) BRACE AT 48" O.G. SECURE TO VERTICAL STUD AND ANGLE ABOVE WITH FOUR NO 10 SGREWS. SECURE TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE WITH 2 "X2 "X16 SAGE XI' -O ANGLE WITH SIX 2" TAPCON SGREWS AT 2" O.G. (MEG) NEW INSULATED CLEAR GLAZING I N I RANSOM (MEG) NEW STOREFRONT ENTRY DOORS (MEG) NEW CEILING CONTINUATION OF EXISTING CEILING - RE: A2.O FOR FILING PLAN (SIG) BRIDGE CONS 1kUGTION BY MALL NOTE: RE: SHEET A4.O FOR STOREFRONT AND EXPANSION JOINT DETAILS THIRD LEVEL il_ii-i, SECOND LEVEL ELEV. (63.55) ELEV. (47.25) EVE_ 55.55) • • d 4 NEW P • LEVEL F 4 ;.• INFILL CEILING TO MATCH EXISTING (MEG) • a .• 4 d. A3.0 4.•• • • 44 • . 4, a a.4 I NTED MALL ENTRY DRYWALL SOFF 1 T AT 10' -0 AFF (MEC) SEARS EW TILE FLOOR - RE: SHEET A2.O FOR FLOOR PLAN (SIG) \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ NEW SECTION AT NEW MALL ENTRY \ \ )21 DEMO SECTION AT NEW MALL ENTRY • 4 .Q 4. 7H - r r T 1 TT T • 4• . A • 4 . rh SCALE: 1/2" = V-0" SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" 4" BRIGK MASONRY TO BE REMOVED AS INDICATED FROM BELOW FLOOR UP TO BOTTOM OF EXISTING BRIGK LEDGE ANGLE (MEG) BOTTOM OF EXISTING BRICK LEDGE SUPPORT ANGLE 8" REINFORCED GMU TO BE REMOVED FROM CONCRETE FLOOR TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE (MEG) DRYWALL AT FURRING IS TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS (SUSPECT ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL) FIXTURE WALL TO BE DISMANTLED AND TURNED OVER TO OWNER FOR REUSE - REMOVE REMAINDER OF DRYWALL AND METAL STUD SYSTEM (MEC) EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING SYSTEM TO BE REMOVED FOR CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LOWERED DRYWALL SOFFIT (MEG) EXISTING CEILING AT 11' -10 ?" AFF TO REMAIN EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE TO REMAIN EXISTING CONCRETE S I RUCTURE TO REMAIN FIRST LEVEL WALL, SOFFIT AND GOLONADE TO REMAIN NOTE: REFER TO PLAN FOR OPENING DIMENSIONS NEW ?" DRYWALL OVER S 5/8 X 16 GA STUD (3625162-55) AT 24" O.G. WITH 16 GAGE TRACK TOP AND BOTTOM AT VERTIGAL AND HORIZONTAL SIDES OF SOFFIT. SECURE STUDS TO EAGHOTHER AT TRACK WITH AT LEAST TWO *10 SCREWS. SECURE TRACK TO STRUCTURE AT EACH STUD WITH TWO 2" TAPCON SCREWS (MEG) NEW MALL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION BY MALL NEW 5 5/8 X 16 SA STUD (3625162 -53) AT 24" O.G. WITH 16 GAGE TRACK TOP AND SECURED TO HORIZONTAL STUDS AT BOTTOM AS CLOSE TO GRILL ENCLOSURE AS POSSIBLE. SECURE TRACK TO STRUCTURE AT EACH STUD WI TH TWO 2" TAPCON SCREWS (MEC) NEW 3 5/8 "X 16 GA STUD (3625162 -53) BRACES AT 48" O.G. SECURE TO VERTIGAL STUDS TWO NO 10 SCREWS (MEG) NEW 5/8" TYPE X DRYWALL (BOTH SIDES AS APPLIGABLE) OVER 5 5/8 X 16 GA STUD (3625162 -55) AT 24" O.G. WITH 16 GAGE TRACK TOP AND BOTTOM (ONE HOUR WALL CONSTRUCTION). SECURE VERTIGAL STUDS TO CONCRETE BEAM AT 12" O.G. WITH 2" TAPCON SGREWS - FURR AS REQUIRED - EXTEND TO BRIGK ON EACH SIDE OF OPENING SOFFIT BY MALL TO MATCH SOFFIT AT SEARS SIDE OF EXPANSION JOINT NEW MOTOR OPERATED ROLLING ALUMINUM GRILL WITH FOLYGARBONATE CLEAR INSERTS - PROVIDE KEY OPERA I i;D SWITCH AND EMERGENCY MANUAL CHAIN OPERATION (MEG) NEW GUIDE FOR ROLLING GRILL (MEG) MALL NEW STONE TILE OVER. TILE SACKER BOARD FURNISHED (PURCHASE TILE FROM MALL OWNER) AND INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT - MATCH MALL INSTALLED TILE PATTERN ACROSS EXPANSION JOINT (MEG) STONE TILE AND BACKING FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MALL - COORDINATE TO MATCH PATTERN AT SEARS RETURN WALL NEW EXPANSION JOINT COVER OVER JOINT BY MALL CARPET FLOORING BY MALL (NOTE FLOOR SLOPES DOWN AT 2% MAXIMUM TO MAIN MALL FLOOR ELEVATION (G.5 ") NOTE: RE: SHEET A4.0 FOR MALL EN 11-.Y AND EXPANSION JOINT DETAILS NEW MALL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION BY MALL EXISTING WALL, SOFFIT AND COLUMNS TO BE ENCLOSED BY MALL E LOi7( 5 RECEIVED c,1Tv 5F'111 4 LA Nov 2 7 20U7 (MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR (SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR 1 77.7/74.7 �rzP /fir 9407 REGISTERE ''. C fECT ROBER S. +v HAFEE 1R, STATE OF WASHINGTON Project Consultant: 5. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Sheet Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO (303) 741 -3737 Contact: Milt Lanser Project Architect: Robert Chafee S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741 -3737 11/19/2007 11/07/2007 2 1 Issue: Date: Scale: AS NOTED Dote: 11-01-2007 Design: MJL Drawn: KJW CADD File: A3.0 Sheet Number: 80237 PRICING /PERMIT REVIEW Description: A3.0 DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR NO. ROOM NO. DOORS FRAMES DETAILS FEATURES HARDWARE GROUP REMARKS SIZE ELEV MAT FIN /COL MAT FIN /COL LABEL GLAZING LOUVER 101 — 22' -0" x 10' -0" A AL /P4 PF AL PF A4 -0 — — — 1 R4 102 — PR 3' -0" x 7-0" B AL /GL PF AL PF A4 -0 — LAM — 2 R1, R3, R4 103 — PR 3' -0" x 7' -0" B AL /GL PF AL PF A4 -0 — LAM — 2 R1, R2, R3, R4 B B B B B B B B A A ,. A 7 7 \ I / " / / / 'c• • A 7 . , / N. N \ ‘. \ \ \ \ = v NEW STONE FLOOR TILE (SIC) CONCRETE MALL ENTRY FLOOR A49) EXPANSION JOINT A4.0 NEW STONE TILE OVER TILE BACKER BOARD OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GAGE METAL STUDS AT 24" 0.C. (MEC) TO 5 MATCH FACE OF BRICK 4' -O" FINISH MALL ENTRY JAMB COLUMN DETAIL L' olip— NEW STONE WALL TILE (MEC) WALL EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY MALL - RE: DETAIL B STONE WALL TILE BY MALL NEW CARPET BY MALL FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT RECESSED COVER AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL NEW GROUT FILL (MEC) SEARS CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE SLAB EDGE FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL - COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC) EXTERIOR ENTRY DOOR HEAD SCALE: 3" = 1 ' -0" 2 ,, 1 METAL CORNER BEAD (SIC) REMOVE FIVE BRICKS BELOW FLOOR LEVEL AND PROIVDE NEW REINFORCED CONCRETE SECTION (MEC) #4 U -BAR AT 12" O.C.- DRILL AN EPDXY TOP AND BOTTOM INTO EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM WITH HILTI HY 150 INJECTION SYSTEM OR EQUAL - 8" MINIMUM EMBEDMENT - INSTALL IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS (MEC) SCALE: 1 1 /2" = 1' —0" NEW DOOR (MEC) s■. wu....r�.r..rw. c:t.r: r�,..• .F: +>['�`• :. ,.��.!u -.� .• •, e:r .��.:. •:. F: w`:`n• �..'1!..r n, :.. •.. .1w Y/ �TM 'y"'y/// Al i7Y. .:H nY.i•,,.r... .y n n?Y.4:r.� ..v Yh /,:�., x, /4 i,ri�'. Yi,.'. 1 r - ��= ar. cirri ,iirr , • r�iorr'a / i r ` . SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD ON 1-5/8" X 25 GA. METAL STUDS TO 6" ABOVE CLG. (SIC) CONCRETE COLUMN METAL CORNER BEAD (SIC) TWO #5 HORIZONTAL FOR LENGTH OF OPENING (MEC) NEW INSULATED CLEAR GLAZING (MEC) NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC) NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE: ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC) EXISTING 3" FLOOR SLEEVE W/ DATA CABLES TO REMAIN EXISTING 4" FLOOR SLEEVE W/ DATA CABLES TO REMAIN 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD ON 1 -5/8" X 25 GA. METAL STUDS TO 6" ABOVE CLG. (SIC) CONCRETE COLUMN SCALE: 1" = 1'— EXISTING METAL STUD AND FIXTURE WALL TO REMAIN - RECONSTRUCT/REPAIR END OF WALL AS REQUIRED FOR TILE MALL ENTRY RETURN WALL (MEC) EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN REFER TO DETAIL B FOR INFORMATION IN THIS AREA NEW DOUBLE 1 14" X 20 GAGE METAL STUDS ON EACH SIDE OF ROLLING GRILL GUIDE (MEC) NEW ROLLING GRILL GUIDE SECURED TO CONCRETE COLUMN - PROVIDE SOLID SHIMMING SYSTEM AND ATTACHMENT AS RECOMMENDED BY ROLLING GRILL MANUFACTURER (MEC) STONE WALL TILE BY MALL FACE OF TILE TO BE FLUSH WITH FACE OF ROLLING GRILL GUIDE CARPET FLOORING BY MALL FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY MALL - RE: DETAIL A NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (51C) B A4.0 EXTEND GYPSUM BOARD UP TO STRUCTURE WHERE THERE IS NO CEILING POWER ACTUATED FASTENERS © 16 ON CENTER SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR CEILING TYPE AND ELEVATION HEIGHT MALL ENTRY WALL EXPANSION JOINT MALL ENTRY TILE CORNER EXTERIOR ENTRY HEAD (LOW) SCALE: 3" = V-0" EASED EDGE TYPICAL SECTION QUIRK MITER BUILDING STRUCTURE DIAGONAL BRACING AT 48" ON CENTER N VERIFY CLEARANCES EXTEND GYPSUM BOARD UP TO STRUCTURE CEILING ELEV. 3 5/8" x 20 GA METAL STUDS @ 16" ON CENTER 1/2" OR 5/8" TYPE "X" GYPSUM BOARD © EACH FACE RESILIENT BASE SIC (TYPICAL) WALL TYPE -- FLOOR TO CEILING SCALE: 1 -1 /2" = 1' -0" EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN REMOVE 4" BRICK TO PROVIDE NEW MALL OPENING (MEC) NEW FIRE SAFING (MEC) NEW DOUBLE 6 "X20 GAGE METAL STUD (MEC) WALL EXPANSION JOINT COVER AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL PREPARE WALL EDGE FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL - COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC) NEW STONE TILE OVER TILE BACKER BOARD (MEC) STONE TILE BY MALL FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY MALL - RE: DETAIL A NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC) CARPET FLOORING BY MALL SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" SCALE: 6" = V-0" NEW OPAQUE FROSTED GLAZED PANEL (MEC) NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE: ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC) NEW DOUBLE STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC) NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC) NEW INSULATED CLEAR GLAZING (MEC) DRYWALL OVER WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED (MEC) NEW CEILING TO MATCH EXISTING (51C) NOTE: RE: SECTION B /A3.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION EXTEND GYPSUM BOARD UP TO BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD ON 3 5/8" METAL STUDS AT 24" 0.C. TYPICAL BOTTOM OF GYP BOARD METAL CORNER BEAD N TYPICAL NA 11 /2" NEW PAINTED MALL ENTRY DRYWALL SOFFIT (MEC) RE: DETAIL D FOR ROLLING GRILL OPENING (MEC) 1 1/4" SIC (TYPICAL) a• 4 A STUDS & BRACING ATTACHED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING CEILING VARIES RE: PLAN SCALE: 1--1 /2" = 1 '-0" '4 4 0. 4 I SEARS FIXTURE WALL FURNISHED & INSTALLED BY SEARS NEW 5/8" TYPE X DRYWALL OVER METAL STUDS (ONE HOUR WALL CONSTRUCTION) (MEC) PREPARE CEILING EDGE FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL - COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC) CEILING EXPANSION JOINT COVER AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL SOFFIT BY MALL TO MATCH SOFFIT AT SEARS SIDE OF EXPANSION JOINT NEW STONE WALL TILE (MEC) STONE WALL TILE BY MALL WALL EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY MALL - RE: DETAIL B NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (51C) NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM DOOR - RE: ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC) NEW ADAAG COMPLIANT ALUMINIUM THRESHOLD SUPPLIED WITH STOREFRONT SYSTEM - SET IN SEALANT -- SQUARE BACK EDGE TO ALIGN WITH TOP OF NEW FLOOR TILE & CLEAR FROM EXP. JT. COVER (MEC) FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT RECESSED COVER AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL PREPARE SLAB EDGE FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL - COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC) NEW GROUT FILL (MEC) REMOVE FIVE BRICKS BELOW FLOOR LEVEL AND PROIVDE NEW REINFORCED CONCRETE SECTION (MEC) #4 U -BAR AT 12" O.C.- DRILL AN EPDXY TOP AND BOTTOM INTO EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM WITH HILTI HY 150 INJECTION SYSTEM OR EQUAL - 8" MINIMUM EMBEDMENT - INSTALL IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS (MEC) TWO #5 HORIZONTAL FOR LENGTH OF OPENING (MEC) FLASHING WITH CONCEALED FASTENER AND PERIMETER SEAL - EXTEND FROM 1" BELOW NEW CONCRETE UP AND UNDER EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER AND UNDER DOOR THRESHOLD - AT EACH EDGE OF OPENING EXTEND FLASHING UP BRICK EDGE 2" BEHIND STOREFRONT FRAMING (MEC) EXTERIOR ENTRY THRESHOLD/ EXPANSION JOINT SCALE: 3" = V-0" EXISTING 4" BRICK MASONRY AND STEEL LEDGER SUPPORT ANGLE TO REMAIN AT TOP OF NEW OPENING SHIM AND SEALANT (MEC) NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE: ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC) NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC) NEW OPAQUE FROSTED GLAZED PANEL (MEC) EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE TO REMAIN EXTERIOR ENTRY HEAD (HIGH) SCAL 3" = 1' -0" �. COLUMN SUPPORT 1 (NO HOOD REQUIRED) COIL AREA A4.0 COILING DOOR OPENING RE: FLOOR PLAN D /A2.0 FOR OPENING WIDTH EXTERIOR ENTRY JAMB ki ELEV. A ELEV. B EXTERIOR ENTRY DOOR ELEVATION, SCHEDULE, AND LEGEND SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" EXTERIOR ENTRY JAMB (HIGH) SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" A = CLEAR INSULATED GLAZING B = OPAQUE FROSTED INSULATED PANEL ELO71b7IS NEW MOTOR OPERATED ROLLING ALUMINUM GRILL WITH POLYCARBONATE CLEAR INSERTS (MEC) EXTEND DRYWALL UP THROUGH OPENING AND WRAP BACK 4" MINIMUM AND FINISH CORNERS (MEC) EXTEND TILE TO TOP OF GRILL OPENING (MEC) NEW GUIDE FOR ROLLING GRILL (MEC) ALIGN INSIDE EDGE OF GRILL GUIDE WITH EDGE OF SECOND FULL TILE UNIT (MEC) RE: DETAIL C FOR EXPANSION JOINT NEW STONE WALL TILE (MEC) SCALE: 3" = 1'--0" NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC) NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE: ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC) NEW DOOR (MEC) NEW 6" DRYWALL OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GAGE METAL STUDS - RE: P /A4.0 FOR WALL TYPE (SIC) NEW THRESHOLD (MEC) NEW STOREFRONT DOOR FRAME (MEC) EXISTING 8" REINFORCED MASONRY TO REMAIN AT EDGE OF NEW OPENING WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED (MEC) EXISTING 4" BRICK MASONRY TO REMAIN AT EDGE OF NEW OPENING NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM FRAME FLUSH WITH BRICK TO TRANSITION TO OFFSET STOREFRONT DOOR FRAME WITH FINISHED EXPOSED EDGE AND FACE (MEC) SHIM AND SEALANT (MEC) PREPARE SLAB EDGE AND BRICK WALL FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL - COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC) WALL TO FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL (EXTENSION OF FLOOR TO FLOOR SYSTEM) FLOOR TO FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE TO REMAIN SHIM AND SEALANT (MEC) CODE CO COMPLIANCE ; D� NFPA 70 - NEC JAN - '7 20+38 . � City �f Tukwila ILDIN DWI ION B NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC) NEW OPAQUE FROSTED GLAZED PANEL (MEC) NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE: ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC) NOTE: RE: DETAIL H FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DOOR SCHEDULE LEGEND MATERIAL & FINISHES AL AL /GL PF TEMP P4 LAM REMARKS R1 PROVIDE THRESHOLD R2 POWER OPERATED DOOR WITH PUSH BUTTONS FOR HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY R3 PROVIDE SIGN AT DOOR TO READ (IBC 1008.1.8.3) "THIS DOOR MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS" R4 PROVIDE BY (MEC) R5 ALUMINUM ALUMINUM AND GLASS PREFINISHED TEMPERED GLASS POLY CARBONATE LAMINATED RECEIVED ark! OF'F2 ile,WILA NOV 2 7 2001 r.= (MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR (SIC) — WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR ROBER S. AFEE JR. STATE OF WASHINGTON EC O L1J Z W U 2 OA O WV 0 1 2 Project Consultant: S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO (303) 741 -3737 Contact: Milt Lanser Project Architect: Robert Chafee S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 5. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741 -3737 11/19/2007 11/07/2007 2 1 Issue: Date: Scale: AS NOTED Date: 11-01-2007 Design: MJL Drawn: KJW CADD File: A4.0 Sheet Number: 80237 PRICING /PERMIT REVIEW Description: A4.0 Drawing Title: 1. REMOVE (1 1) FLUORESCENT 1X4 WALL WASHERS. (SIC) 2. RE— INSTALL (5) FLUORESCENT 1X4 WALL WASHERS. (SIC) 3. TURN THE REMAINING (6) FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS OVER TO THE SEARS PROJECT MANAGER (SIC) 4. REMOVE (10) 4 FOOT SINGLE LAv1P FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURES AND TURN THEvA OVER TO THE SEARS PROJECT MANAGER. (SIC) EXTERIOR ENTRY MECHANICAL /LIGHTING w ■■■■■■ ■■ 11111111 ■ ■■■■•■■ 11111111 MEI VB ADA POWER OPERATED DOOR 120 VOLTS, 5 AMPS (MEC) EXTERIOR ENTRY ELECTRICAL POWER ME.1 RF 0 (N 0 ELECTRICAL PLAN 11 FIRST /GROUND LEVEL 2#12, . 1—#12G 3/4 "C. (1) SPARE 20A.1 P.0 /B.IN LP-2LAA, CCT.27 ELECT. ROOM 2A (MEC) 1' NEW PLAN (WORK BY SIC) SCALE: 1/8" = 1'— 0 SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0 0 9 1 x r rA NEW 12" ROUND 3 —WAY BLOW CEILING DIFFUSER 500 CFM; MAKE NEW CONNECTION TO BOTTOM OF EXISTING SUPPLY DUCT WITH NEW 1 -2 R:E3l } xj..;B _> , : Q I T._ I. (Si 1. RELOCATE (5) FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS — EXTEND EXISTING CIRCUIT AS 2. ADD (6) NEW 2X2 RECESSED TYPE 'A' FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES; 9 MATCH EXISTING; 120 VOLT; BLACK REVEAL (SIC) 3. ADD (1) NEW EXIT SIGN TO MATCH EXISTING — WIRE TO CONSTANT SECTION IN PANEL EM -1 (120 VOLTS) EMERGENCY LIGHTS ARE ON THE SWITCHED SECTION IN PANEL EM -1 (120 VOLTS). (SIC) 4. ADD (2) NEW TYPE 'C' LIGHITNG FIXTURES — EXTERIOR BESIDE BRIIDGE DOORS — LUMARK #MH -1 P— W -70 -1 120 —Q —PE 16" WIDE x 9" HIGH — MOUNT 10' —O AFF — COLOR BRONZE — DESCRIPTION: IMPACT WEDGE, FULL CUTOFF, WALL MOUNTED LUMINAIRE WITH QUARTZ RESTRIKE, PHOTO CELL CONTROL — 70 WATT METAL HALIDE LAMP_ (MEC) 5. PROVIDE (2) NEW COMMERCIAL CEILING HEATERS — MARKEL #F3482 —T —S — 2.0 KW, 208 VOLTS, SINGLE PHASE, RECESSED CEILING HEATERS WITH BUILT IN THERMOSTAT AND DISCONNECT SWITCH; WHITE POWDER COAT FINISH. (SIC i J J HHST LFVFi i NEW MECHANICAL /LIGHTING EXTERIOR ENTRY Eldismsammim 8 min ; l 3#12, 1#1.20, 3/4 "C. TO (2) SPARE 20A.1P.C/B'S PANEL 2LC; CCTS. 32,34 — PROVIDE NEW TWO CIRCUIT TIME CLOCK 120 VOLII S, 24HR /7DAY WITH ASTRONOMICAL IAL. STORE OPENING TO STORE LOSING CONTROLS TO ELECTRICAL ROOM 2C (MEC) J.B. ABOVE, LAY —IN b EILING (TYP. FOR 5) (MEC 81_0II 11_01I 1. SEARS SIGN FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY SIGN CONTRACTOR_ ALL WIRING BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (MEC) NEW MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN (WORK BY SIC) IHIIII IIIIIIIIIifl .............................. 110 J111101111 0 1 AMR I ;':!:iii 1111111111111111' ELECTRICAL ROOM 1B 0 XISTING FUSER 22' -S" .. LiA 0 X ILI STING 14 " PL'' DUCT N x EMI 31 C, PC EMI 31 (2) ELECTRICAL HEATERS (SEE a a 4 4 4 1111 H AlIIV .u�■wA lI��JIRr FA ISM= W■ = 15 34 EXSTING 1 SUPPLY DUCT 29 29 29 C, PC 25 PLAN AT INDICATED. (SIC) CELL; 3' PARABOLIC; 3 SCALE: 1/8" = 1' — 2 #12, 1#12G, 3/4 "C. (1) SPARE 20A.1P.C/B. PANEL 2LCC, CCT_ 15 (MEC) 1/2HP 120 VOLTS MOTORIZED GATE. FLA =8.2 (MEC) KEY OPERATED RAISE LOWER SWITCH PROVIDED WITH MOTORIZED GATE MOUNT 42" +/— AFF (MEC) SCALE: 1/8" = 1'— 7 X X 2—#12, 1—#12G, 3/4" C. TO (1) SPARE 20A.1P.C/B. PANEL LP2_,; 25 TO ELECTICAL ROOM 2A (MEC) PROVIDE MC EXIBLE METAL CONDUIT 2#12, 1#12, G 1/2"C. THROUGH HOLE IN "EXTERIOR" WALL AND BACK ABOVE LAY —IN CEILING (TYP. FOR 5). NOTE: EXACT LOCATION OF ROUGH —IN POINT IS CRITICAL AT SIGN COORDINATE CLOSELY WITH SIGN SUPPLIER (MEC) 4' -0" HIGH SEARS SIGN 120 VOLTS SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION 0 LIGHT BOX: 72"X72 "X6 -3/4" 605 WATTS, 120 VOLTS (TYPICAL FOR 3) (MEC) O2 HOMERUN: 2 — #10, 1 — #10G 3/4 "C SPARE 20A.1P.C/B IN PANEL 1LB (ELECTRICAL ROOM 1B), CCT. 29. TIME CLOCK 120v, 24 —HR, 7 —DAY WITH ASTRONOMICAL DIAL. STORE OPENING TO STORE CLOSING (MEC) B X X 4 — #12, 1—#1 3/4 "C. (2) NE 15A.2P.0 /B PANEL LP -2LA& COTS. 36 -38; 40 -42 TO ELECTRICAL OM 2A (SIC LAMP = BIAX 24" LONG TO LIGHTING POWE w DEMOLITION SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION X EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO REMAIN XRR EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED, RELOCATED AND JUNCTION BOX REMOVED OR CAPPED AS REQUIRED XR EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET RELOCATED (NEW LOCATION) R EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED XC EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED AND JUNCTION BOX CAPPED AS REQUIRED XO NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OVER EXISTING OUTLET XA EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE ABANDONED XM EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE MODIFIED 1. REMOVE AND RELOCATE (5) 2X2 RECESSED FLOURESCENT FIXTURES. (MEC) 2. REMOVE (7) 1X4 RECESSED FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS AND TURN OVER TO SEARS PROJECT MANAGER. (MEC) MALL ENTRY LIGHTING ME.1 DEMOLITION PLAN 0 --N-- E�LE �TRICAL FA IVI 2A ROBE S. CHAFES JR. STATE OF WASHINGTON 0 NEW EXTERIOR - wI - ENTRr 'IIImIII' AIIU ( 7 T\ SECOND LEVEL NEW ENTRIES ELECTRICAL ME.1 REFERENCE PLAN SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0" • \ / 0 ELECTRICAL ROOM 2C 0 9 749 9 0 —.— - - -- 1. INSTALL (5) EXISTING RELOCATED (XR) 2X2 RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURES. (MEC) 2. PROVIDE (7) NEW TYPE 'B' MALL ENTRANCE FIXTURES. TYPE 'B' FIXTURE IS HALO RECESSED DOWNLIGHT, 8" APERTURE, (2) LAMP 26 WATT DTT, CATALOG NO H787HP -98700 CLEAR SPECULAR REFLECTOR, 120 VOLTS, HIGH POWER FACTOR BALLAST, 6 5/8" HIGH X 8 3/16" (MEC) 0 0 0 £L» 7(3 CONNECT TO EXISTING FLUORESCENT WALL —WASH CIRCUITS (MEC) INSTALL I N MALL SOFFIT COORDINATE WITH MALL CONTRACTOR (MEC) r - 1 J B LIGHTING POWER RECEIVED CITY OF T KWILA NOV 2 7 2001 of l" (FNTE (MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR (SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE N NEC E NF PA - 7 M8 City Of Tukwila ILDIN : DIVI ION Project Consultant: S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO (303) 741 —3737 Contact: Milt Lanser Project Architect: Robert Chafee 5. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741 -3737 11/19/2007 11/07/2007 2 Issue: Date: Scale: AS NOTED Date: 1 1 -01 -2007 Design: MJL Drawn: KJW CADD File: ME.1 Sheet Number: 80237 PRICING /PERMIT REVIEW Description: M E.1 Panel 2LAA 120 /208 volts 120/208 volts Electrical Room 2C Electrical Room 2A 100 amps 13 pole switch (100 amp fuse) 1 3 phase / 4 wire 3 phase /4wire ; U - — I* CL 0 — N I — • L -- I:::. LOCATION KVA KVA LOCATION 1 a 1 r 4. O 4} 1 1 1 20 Spare Track Lighting Column Receptacles POS System Receptacles 20 1 2 3 1 20 Column Receptacles - Southwest Track Lighting Column Receptacles POS System Receptacles 20 1 4 5 1 20 Column Receptacles - Southwest Track Lighting Spare Sales Receptacles - Idea Center 20 1 6 7 1 20 Spare Track Lighting Column Receptacles POS System Receptacles 20 1 8 9 1 20 Spare Track Lighting Spare Column Receptacles - Southwest 20 1 10 11 1 20 Spare Wall Washer Accent Lighting Spare Column Receptacles - Southwest 20 1 12 13 1 20 Spare Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fitting Room Receptacles Receptacle - Passenger Elev - South 20 1 14 15 1 20 Spare Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fitting Room Receptacles Spare 20 1 16 17 1 20 Spare Wall Washer Accent Lighting POS System Receptacles • Column Receptacles - SW Storage 20 1 18 19 1 20 Column Receptacles - Southwest Stock Room Lights Spare Receptacles - SW Storage 20 1 20 21 1 20 Column Receptacles - Southwest General Lighting Spare _Column Column Receptacles - SW Storage 20 1 22 23 1 20 Column Receptacles - Southwest Janitor Room Receptacle Column Receptacles Batt Pack /Lighting - North Escalator 20 1 24 25 1 20 Spare Exterior Entry Lighting Column Receptacles Blank Space 20 1 26 27 1 20 Exterior Entry - Power Assist Door 0.75 Exit Alarms with 42 Spare 20 1 28 29 1 20 Spare Spare Spare S pare 20 1 30 - 31 1 20 Spare Spare 1.20 Blank Space 20 1 32 33 1 - 20 Spare Spare 1.20 Blank Space 20 1 34 35 1 20 Spare Spare 1.00 Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater 15 2 36 37 1 20 Spare Circuit Column 9 p Spare 1.00 38 39 1 20 Spare Circuit Column GG9 1 1.00 Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater 15 2 40 41 1 40 Blank S ace p 1 1.00 42 Pa n e 2LC I 120/208 volts Electrical Room 2C Electrical Room 2C 200 amps 1 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse) 1 3 phase / 4 wire 3 phase / 4 wire ; U - — I* EL 0 — cu I- s- • - fa LOCATION � KVA KVA LOCATION I- L .- f. 11 0 — N 1 1 1 20 Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting Column Receptacles Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 20 1 2 3 1 20 Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting Column Receptacles Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 20 1 4 5 1 20 Track Lighting /Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting Spare Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 20 1 6 7 1 20 Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting Track Lighting Column Receptacles Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 20 1 8 9 1 20 Track LightinglWaII Washer Lighting Track Lighting Spare Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 20 1 10 11 1 20 Spare Wall Washer Accent Lighting Spare Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 12 13 1 20 Track Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fitting Room Receptacles Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 14 15 1 20 Cornice Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fitting Room Receptacles Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 16 17 1 20 Cornice Lighting Wall Washer Accent Lighting POS System Receptacles Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 18 19 1 20 Cornice Lighting Stock Room Lights Spare Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 20 21 1 20 Cornice Lighting General Lighting Spare Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East 20 1 22 23 1 20 Cornice Lighting Janitor Room Receptacle Column Receptacles Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East 20 1 24 25 1 20 Cornice Lighting Exterior Entry Lighting Column Receptacles Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East 20 1 26 27 1 20 Cornice Lighting Spare Exit Alarms with 42 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East 20 1 28 29 1 20 Track Lighting Spare Spare Spare Spare 20 1 30 31 1 20 Track Lighting Spare Spare 1.20 Mall Entry Sign 20 1 32 33 1 20 Track Lighting Spare Spare 1.20 Mall Entry Sign 20 1 34 35 1 20 Stock Lighting Spare Spare Spare 20 1 36 37 1 20 Spare Spare Spare Neon Lighting - Christmas 20 1 38 39 1 20 Neon Lighting Spare Spare Neon Lighting 20 1 40 41 1 20 Spare Blank Space Exit Alarms Neon Lighting 20 1 42 Panel 2LCC 120/208 volts I 120/208 volts Electrical Room 2C 100 amps 1 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse) j 200 amps 1 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse) 3 phase / 4 wire 3 phase ! 4 wire 0_ 0 — 0 1— — •— 0- LOCATION KVA KVA LOCATION I- s-- • - a. 11 0 — N 0 - 1 1 20 Spare 20 Track Lighting Column Receptacles 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 2 3 2 20 Column Receptacles 20 Track Lighting Column Receptacles 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 4 5 4 20 Spare 20 Track Lighting Spare 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 6 7 6 20 POS System Receptacles 20 Track Lighting Column Receptacles 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 8 9 8 20 Column Receptacles 20 Track Lighting Spare 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr 10 11 10 20 Column Receptacles 20 Wall Washer Accent Lighting Spare 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting -West & Ctr 12 13 12 20 Column Receptacles 20 Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fitting Room Receptacles 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr 14 15 14 20 Mall Rolling Grill 0.98 Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fitting Room Receptacles 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 16 17 16 20 Spare 20 Wall Washer Accent Lighting POS System Receptacles 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 18 19 18 20 Spare 20 Stock Room Lights Spare 20 Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) 20 21 20 20 Spare 20 General Lighting Spare 20 Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) 22 23 22 20 Spare 20 Janitor Room Receptacle Column Receptacles 20 Spare Circuit (oar Janitor Closet) 24 25 24 20 POS System Receptacles 20 Exterior Entry Lighting Column Receptacles 20 Spare 26 27 26 20 Stack/Funtranics Receptacles 20 Spare Exit Alarms with 42 20 Spare 28 29 28 20 Spare 20 Spare Spare 20 Stock Room Lighting 30 31 30 20 Spare 20 Spare Spare 20 Stock Room Lighting 32 33 32 20 Electrical Room Lighting 20 Spare Spare 20 Stock Room Lighting 34 35 34 20 Spare 20 Spare Spare 20 Stock Room Lighting 36 37 36 20 Spare 20 Spare Spare 20 Spare 38 39 38 20 Spare 20 Spare Spare 20 Spare 40 41 40 20 Spare Blank Space Exit Alarms Blank Space 42 Pa n e 2LA I 120/208 volts f 100 amps 1 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse) Electrical Room 2A 200 amps 1 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse) 3 phase / 4 wire 3 phase ! 4 wire CL O - 11) I— L • — i2 CL 0 — (U I- L • - Q. LOCATION KVA KVA LOCATION i L • _ CL 0 - N 1 1 1 20 Track Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 20 1 2 3 1 20 Track Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 20 1 4 5 1 20 Track Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 20 1 6 7 1 20 Track Lighting Blank Space Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West 20 1 8 9 1 20 Track Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr 20 1 10 11 1 20 Wall Washer Accent Lighting Blank Space Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting -West & Ctr 20 1 12 13 1 20 Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr 20 1 14 15 1 20 Wall Washer Accent Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 16 17 1 20 Wall Washer Accent Lighting Track Lighting 30 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 18 19 1 20 Stock Room Lights Spare 20 Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) 20 1 20 21 1 20 General Lighting Spare 20 Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet) 20 1 22 23 1 20 Janitor Room Receptacle Blank Space Spare Circuit (oar Janitor Closet) 20 1 24 25 1 20 Exterior Entry Lighting 0.14 Spare 20 1 26 27 1 20 Spare Spare 20 1 28 29 1 20 Spare Stock Room Lighting 20 1 30 31 1 20 Spare Stock Room Lighting 20 1 32 33 1 20 Spare Stock Room Lighting 20 1 34 35 1 20 Spare Stock Room Lighting 20 1 36 37 1 20 Spare Spare 20 1 38 39 1 20 Spare Spare 20 1 40 41 Blank Space Blank Space 42 Panel ILB-2 120/208 volts 1 Electrical Room 1B 100 amps 1 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse) 3 phase / 4 wire CL O - 11) I— L • — i2 LOCATION KVA KVA LOCATION L •— 0 CL 0 - Q} 25 1 20 Light Boxes - Shoe Department Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 26 27 1 20 Light Boxes - Shoe Department Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 28 29 1 20 Exterior Light Boxes 1.82 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 30 31 Blank Space Blank Space 32 33 1 20 Stock Room Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center 20 1 34 35 Blank Space Blank Space 36 37 1 20 Office & Hall Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East 20 1 38 39 1 20 Restroom Lighting Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East 20 1 40 41 1 - 20 Wall Washer Accent Lighting Track Lighting 30 1 42 43 1 20 Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Sales Spare 20 1 44 45 Blank Space Spare 20 1 46 47 1 20 Spare Blank Space 48 REVIEWED ' CODE COMPLIANCE NFPA 7 - N JAM -72 City of tukwiila BUILDING DIiISION. APPROVED Pt 1,77 77 C' :ANCED, MODIFIED CR ALTERED WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION FROM THE BUILDING Ofl AL, AL I WORK SHALL BE DCNE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPROVED PLANS AN IS J3,:aDT TO FIELD INSPECTIONS Pubic Web, Building Division PERMIT NUMBER INCOMPLETE LTR # ELo1 vn F OPY RECEIVED DEC 14 2007 PERMIT CENTER Project Consultant: S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO (303) 741 -3737 Contact: Milt Lanser Project Architect: Robert Chafee S. A. Miro, Inc. 4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway Suite 1501 Denver, CO 80237 (303) 741 - 3737 /I/ REGISTERED 'CHI ECT ROBER S. AFEE JR. STATE OF WA HINGTON 9407 1 12/11/2007 ADDENDUM #1 Issue: Date: Description: Scale: AS NOTED Dote: 12-10-2007 Design: MJL Drawn: KJW CADD File: ME.2 Sheet Number: 80237 OT SCHEDULES Drawing Title: